Mercedes - C-Class Coupe - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you drive off, please familiarise yourself with your vehicle and read this manual, especially the safety and warning notices. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endangering yourself and others. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may differ according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the arrangement and location of vehicle parts and controls differ accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the illustrations or text content in this manual. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. 2045844982Z102 É2045844982Z102!ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29 Introduction ......................................... 25 Safety ................................................... 43 Opening and closing ........................... 77 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 107 Climate control ................................. 121 Driving and parking .......................... 135 On-board computer and displays .... 205 Stowing and features ....................... 283 Maintenance and care ...................... 299 Breakdown assistance ..................... 313 Wheels and tyres .............................. 335 Technical data ................................... 349 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12-button multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 211 Overview .......................................... 39 12 V socket see Sockets 4-button multifunction steering wheel Overview .......................................... 38 4-button multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 207 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 238 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 234 Function/notes ................................ 65 Important safety notes .................... 65 Warning lamp ................................. 275 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 127 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 124 Active Blind Spot Assist Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 259 Function/notes ............................. 194 Switching on/off (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 222 Towing a trailer .............................. 197 Active Driving Assistance package . 194 Active Lane Keeping Assist Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 258 Function/information .................... 197 Switching on/off (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 222 Towing a trailer .............................. 199 Active light function ......................... 111 Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 71 Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 67 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function/notes ............................. 112 Adaptive Main-beam Assist Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 251 Adaptive Main-Beam Assist Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 225 Additional speedometer ................... 223 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 356 Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 110 Airbags Activation ......................................... 45 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 48 Important safety guidelines ............. 46 Kneebag ........................................... 48 Pelvis airbag .................................... 49 Sidebag ............................................ 48 Windowbag ...................................... 49 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air filter Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 253 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Glove compartment ....................... 133 Important safety notes .................. 132 Rear ............................................... 133 Setting ........................................... 132 Setting the centre air vents ........... 133 Setting the side air vents ............... 133 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Alertness Assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST AMGMenu (on-board computer) ....... 229 Anti-glare film .................................... 297 Index Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Anti-theft system Immobiliser ...................................... 73 Aquaplaning ....................................... 161 Ashtray ............................................... 290 ASSYST PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ASSYST PLUS service interval display Displaying service messages ......... 305 Hiding service messages ............... 305 Notes ............................................. 305 Service messages .......................... 305 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 73 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 73 Function ........................................... 73 Interior motion sensor ..................... 74 Switching off the alarm .................... 73 Tow-away protection ........................ 73 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 222 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 256 Function/notes ............................. 188 Audio DVD (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......................... 218 Audio menu (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................................................. 217 AUTO lights Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 250 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 142 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 141 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 147 Automatic drive program ............... 148 Changing gear ............................... 146 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Problem (fault) ............................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Releasing the parking lock manually ............................................... Selector lever ................................ Shift ranges ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Trailer towing ................................. Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... Automatic transmissions Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Auxiliary heating Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. Setting (on-board computer, 12button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ Setting the departure time ............. Auxiliary ventilation Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ...................................................... 265 147 152 147 150 152 147 140 152 146 149 139 148 147 146 146 152 267 128 128 128 132 129 227 130 128 128 132 129 363 5 6 Index B Bag hook ............................................ 287 Ball coupling Folding in ....................................... 202 Folding out ..................................... 201 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 66 Basic settings see Settings BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 66 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 81 Important safety notes .................... 80 Replacing ......................................... 81 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 328 Connecting .................................... 327 Disconnecting ................................ 327 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 252 Important safety notes .................. 325 Jump starting ................................. 329 Location ......................................... 326 Removing/fitting ........................... 327 Belt see Seat belt Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 45 Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 45 Function ........................................... 54 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 222 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 259 Notes/function .............................. 190 Trailer towing ................................. 192 see Active Blind Spot Assist Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) ............................................... 300 Closing ........................................... 302 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 268 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 266 Opening ......................................... 301 Boot Emergency release .......................... 87 Important safety guidelines ............. 85 Locking separately ........................... 87 Opening (automatically from inside) .............................................. 87 Opening (automatically from outside) ................................................. 86 Boot lid Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 268 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 266 Opening/closing .............................. 85 Opening dimensions ...................... 360 Boot load (maximum) see Technical data Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 241 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 236 Notes ............................................. 356 Brake lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 249 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 245 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 67 Changing bulbs .............................. 118 Brakes ABS .................................................. 65 BAS .................................................. 66 BAS PLUS ........................................ 66 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 356 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 238 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 234 Driving tips .................................... 159 High-performance brake system .... 161 Important safety notes .................. 159 Index Parking brake ................................ 159 Warning lamp ................................. 275 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away/tow-starting Bulbs see Changing bulbs C Calling up a fault see Display messages Capacities see Technical data Car see Vehicle Care Automatic car wash ....................... 306 Display ........................................... 310 Exterior lighting ............................. 309 High-pressure cleaner .................... 307 Matt paintwork .............................. 308 Notes ............................................. 306 Paint .............................................. 307 Plastic trim .................................... 310 Reversing camera .......................... 309 Seat belt ........................................ 311 Seat cover ..................................... 311 Sensors ......................................... 309 Tail pipes ....................................... 309 Trim pieces .................................... 311 Wheels ........................................... 307 Windows ........................................ 308 Wiper blades .................................. 308 Wooden trim .................................. 311 Car key see Key Car wash (care) ................................. 306 CD player/CD changer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......... 218 Cell phone see Mobile phone Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 226 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 78 Centre console ..................................... 40 Changing bulbs Brake lamps ................................... 118 Cornering light function ................. 117 Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 116 Important safety notes .................. 114 Main-beam headlamps ................... 116 Overview of bulb types .................. 115 Parking lamps (front) ..................... 117 Reversing lamps ............................ 118 Standing lamps .............................. 117 Child-proof locks Child seat lock ................................. 56 Children In the vehicle ................................... 55 Restraint systems ............................ 55 Child seat Automatic recognition ..................... 57 Child seat lock ................................. 56 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 243 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 237 ISOFIX .............................................. 58 On the front-passenger seat ............ 57 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 61 Recommendations ........................... 63 Suitable positions ............................ 61 Cigarette lighter ................................ 291 Cleaning Trailer tow hitch ............................. 309 Climate control Activating/deactivating rear window heating ................................... 126 Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 128 Controlling automatically ............... 124 Convenience opening/closing (air recirculation) ................................. 127 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 124 Demisting the windows .................. 126 Demisting the windscreen ............. 126 Important safety notes .................. 122 Indicator lamp ................................ 124 Notes on using THERMATIC automatic climate control ..................... 123 Overview of systems ...................... 122 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 124 7 8 Index Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 127 Setting the air distribution ............. 125 Setting the airflow ......................... 125 Setting the air vents ...................... 132 Setting the temperature ................ 125 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 127 Switching on/off ........................... 124 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 125 THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) ............................. 123 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 30 see Instrument cluster COMAND Online see separate operating instructions Combination switch .......................... 110 Constant headlamp mode see Daytime driving lamps Consumption statistics On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 215 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 210 Convenience closing feature .............. 89 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 127 Convenience opening feature ............ 88 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 303 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 254 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 251 Notes ............................................. 356 Temperature display (12-button multifunction steering wheel; AMG) ............................................. 229 Temperature gauge (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 210 Temperature gauge (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 206 Warning lamp ................................. 280 Cooling see Climate control Cornering lamps Changing bulbs .............................. Cornering light function Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Function/notes ............................. Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... Deactivating ................................... Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Driving system ............................... Important safety notes .................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Selecting ........................................ Setting a speed .............................. Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. Rear compartment ......................... 117 248 244 111 114 162 164 261 256 162 162 162 163 164 163 289 289 290 D Dashboard see Cockpit Data see Technical data Daytime driving lamps Switching on/off (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Daytime driving lights Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Switching on/off (on-board computer, 4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Switching on/off (switch) .............. 224 250 247 210 109 Index Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Interior lighting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Diesel .................................................. Diesel particle filter .......................... Digital speedometer ......................... Dipped beam Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Dipped-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. Switching on/off ........................... Display (cleaning instructions) ........ Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ASSYST PLUS service interval ....... Calling up ....................................... Driving systems ............................. Engine ............................................ General notes ................................ Hiding ............................................ Key ................................................ KEYLESS-GO .................................. Lights ............................................. Safety systems .............................. Tyres .............................................. Vehicle ........................................... Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ASSYST PLUS service interval ....... Calling up ....................................... Driving systems ............................. Engine ............................................ General notes ................................ Hiding ............................................ Key ................................................ KEYLESS-GO .................................. Lights ............................................. Safety systems .............................. 225 225 154 159 215 244 116 248 108 224 109 310 305 233 256 254 232 232 271 271 247 238 263 267 305 232 256 251 232 232 270 270 244 234 Tyres .............................................. 262 Vehicle ........................................... 265 Distance display (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .................................. 221 Distance recorder 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 215 see Trip meter Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 282 DISTRONIC PLUS Deactivating ................................... 171 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 260 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 171 Driving tips .................................... 172 Function/notes ............................. 164 Important safety notes .................. 164 Selecting ........................................ 166 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 170 Warning lamp ................................. 282 Door Automatic door locking feature (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 78 Control panel ................................... 42 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 268 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 266 Emergency locking ........................... 85 Emergency unlocking ....................... 85 Important safety notes .................... 83 Opening (from the inside) ................ 84 Drinks holder see Cup holders Drive program Automatic ...................................... 148 Display ........................................... 146 Manual ........................................... 150 Drive program selector ..................... 148 Driver's door see Door 9 10 Index Driver's seat see Seats Drive system Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 194 Driving abroad Service24h .................................... 306 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 108 Driving on flooded roads .................. 161 Driving safety system BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 66 Electronic Brake-force Distribution .................................................. 71 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 67 Important safety guidelines ............. 65 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 65 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 71 Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 67 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 66 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 68 Overview .......................................... 65 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 71 Driving system Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 197 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 256 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 256 Driving systems Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 194 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 188 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 190 Cruise control ................................ 162 Distronic Plus ................................ 164 Dynamic handling package with sports mode .................................. 176 HOLD function ............................... 177 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 192 Lane package ................................ 190 Parking Guidance ........................... 183 Parktronic ...................................... 179 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 178 Reversing camera .......................... 186 Speed Limit Assist ......................... Speedtronic ................................... Driving tips Aquaplaning ................................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Downhill gradient ........................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. Towing a trailer .............................. Tyre grip ........................................ Wet road surface ........................... Dynamic handling package with sports mode ....................................... 189 173 161 147 159 172 159 108 161 161 161 159 162 160 160 136 338 108 199 161 160 176 E EASY-ENTRY feature ............................ 99 Activating/deactivating (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 228 Function/notes ............................. 102 EASY-EXIT feature Activating/deactivating (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 228 Function/notes ............................. 102 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Function/notes ................................ 71 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Display message (12 button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 240 EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 235 Index ECO start/stop function Deactivating/activating ................. 142 General information ....................... 140 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electronic Brake force Distribution see EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Electronic Traction System see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 85 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 80 Locking vehicle ................................ 85 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 85 Emergency spare wheel Notes/data .................................... 346 Storage location ............................ 316 Emergency unlocking Boot ................................................. 87 Vehicle ............................................. 85 Engine ECO start/stop function ................ 140 Emergency starting ........................ 333 Engine number ............................... 353 Running irregularly ......................... 143 Starting problems .......................... 143 Starting the engine with the key .... 139 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 139 Stopping ........................................ 158 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 280 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 351 Problem (fault) ............................... 143 Engine oil Additives ........................................ 356 Checking the oil level ..................... 302 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 253 Filling capacity ............................... 355 Notes about oil grades ................... 355 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 302 Temperature (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 229 Topping up ..................................... 303 Viscosity ........................................ 356 Environmental protection Note ................................................. 25 Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 25 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 229 Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 69 Deactivating/activating (except AMG vehicles) ................................ 221 Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 68 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 238 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 234 ETS .................................................. 68 Function/notes ................................ 67 Important safety guidelines ............. 67 Trailer stabilisation .......................... 70 Warning lamp ................................. 277 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 68 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 309 Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 103 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 104 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 103 Folding in (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 228 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104 Parking position ............................. 104 Resetting ....................................... 104 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 105 11 12 Index F Fatigue Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST Fault message see Display messages Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... 315 First-aid kit ......................................... 314 Flat tyre Changing a wheel/fitting the spare wheel ................................... 321 MOExtended run-flat system ......... 324 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 316 Raising the vehicle ......................... 322 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 317 Floormat ............................................. 297 Foglamps Extended range .............................. 112 Switching on/off ........................... 109 Frequencies Garage door opener ....................... 297 Mobile phone ................................. 351 Two-way radio ................................ 351 Front foglamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 249 Front foglamps Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 246 Switching on/off ........................... 109 Front windscreen see Windscreen Fuel Displaying the range (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 215 Displaying the range (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 210 Important safety notes .................. 354 Notes about consumption ............. 354 Problem (malfunction) ................... 157 Refuelling ....................................... 152 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 354 Tank content display (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......... 35 Tank content display (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .......... 32 Fuel consumption Current (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Fuel filler flap Opening/closing ............................ Fuel filter Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Fuel reserve Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Fuse box in the boot ...................... Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Important safety notes .................. 215 155 255 253 255 253 354 157 315 334 334 334 334 333 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... Frequencies ................................... Notes ............................................. Opening/closing the garage door .. Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... Gear indicator (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .................. Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Glove compartment .......................... 296 297 294 295 294 229 229 350 285 Index H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 111 Headlamp Cleaning system (function) ............ 110 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 113 Topping up the cleaning system .... 304 see Automatic headlamp mode Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 98 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98 see NECK-PRO head restraints Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... 307 Hill start assist .................................. 140 HOLD function Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 257 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 256 Function/notes ............................. 177 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 73 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 280 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 282 Engine diagnostics ......................... 280 Fuel tank ........................................ 280 Overview (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ......................... 37 Overview (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................................ 34 SPORT handling mode ................... 278 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Indicator and warning lamps ............ 37 Overview .......................................... 35 Settings ......................................... 223 Instrument cluster (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Indicator and warning lamps ............ 34 Overview .......................................... 32 Instrument cluster lighting Multifunction steering wheel with 12 buttons ....................................... 35 Multifunction steering wheel with 4 buttons ......................................... 32 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 224 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 250 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left . 224 Interior lighting Automatic control system .............. 114 Delayed switch-off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 225 Emergency lighting ........................ 114 Manual control ............................... 114 Overview ........................................ 114 Reading lamp ................................. 114 see Interior lighting Interior motion sensor ........................ 74 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 58 J Jack Storage location ............................ 315 Using ............................................. 322 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 329 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 81 Checking the battery ....................... 81 Convenience closing feature ............ 89 13 14 Index Convenience opening feature .......... 88 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 270 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 78 Emergency key element ................... 80 Loss ................................................. 82 Modifying the programming ............. 79 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 137 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82 Starting the engine ........................ 139 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ........................ 89 Display message (12-button multifunction display) .......................... 271 Display message (4-button multifunction display) ............................ 270 Locking ............................................ 79 Start/Stop button .......................... 137 Starting the engine ........................ 139 Unlocking ......................................... 79 Key positions Key ................................................ 137 KEYLESS GO .................................. 137 Keys Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 147 Manual drive program .................... 150 Kneebag ............................................... 48 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane-change assistant see Blind Spot Assist Lane detection (automatic) see Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Function/information .................... Lane package ..................................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Lashing eyelets ................................. 222 258 192 190 229 287 Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the exterior lighting delayed switch-off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ Active light function ....................... Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Foglamps ....................................... Foglamps (extended range) ........... Hazard warning lamps ................... Headlamp flasher ........................... Headlamp range ............................ Light switch ................................... Main-beam headlamps ................... Motorway mode ............................. Parking lamps ................................ Rear foglamp ................................. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (switch) ..................... Switching the surround lighting on/off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Turn signals ................................... see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting 225 224 225 111 109 111 109 108 109 112 111 111 110 108 110 112 108 109 225 224 210 109 225 110 Index Light sensor Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 250 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 247 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 162 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 166 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 174 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC Loading guidelines ............................ 284 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 84 Emergency locking ........................... 85 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 84 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 226 Luggage net ....................................... 285 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 99 Luxury multifunction steering wheel see 12-button multifunction steering wheel M M+S tyres ........................................... Main beam Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Main-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. Switching on/off ........................... Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS service interval display 337 246 116 249 112 110 Manual transmission Engaging reverse gear ................... 145 Gear lever ...................................... 144 Pulling away ................................... 139 Shifting to neutral .......................... 145 Shift recommendation ................... 145 Starting the engine ........................ 138 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 308 Memory card (audio) ......................... 218 Memory function ............................... 105 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 233 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 232 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... 351 Installation ..................................... 351 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 219 Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 292 Transmission output (maximum) .... 351 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 79 MOExtended run-flat system ........... 324 Motorway mode ................................ 112 MP3 Operating ....................................... 218 see Separate operating instructions Multifunction display 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 207 Permanent display (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 223 Multi-function display 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 212 Multifunction steering wheel (12button) see 12-button multifunction steering wheel 15 16 Index Multifunction steering wheel (4 buttons) see 4-button multifunction steering wheel N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 216 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 216 see separate operating instructions NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 50 Resetting after being triggered ........ 51 Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 136 O Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Important safety notes .................... 44 Odometer 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 209 see Total distance recorder see Trip meter Oil see Engine oil On-board computer RACETIMER ................................... 229 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) AMG menu ..................................... 229 Assist menu ................................... 220 Audio menu ................................... 217 Convenience submenu .................. 228 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 171 Important safety notes .................. 206 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 223 Lights submenu ............................. 224 Menu overview .............................. 214 Navigation menu ............................ 216 Operating ....................................... 211 Operating the video DVD ............... 218 Range ............................................ 215 Service menu ................................. 222 Standard display submenu ............ 215 Telephone menu ............................ 219 Trip menu ...................................... 215 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displaying service messages ......... 305 Display messages .......................... 232 Heating submenu ........................... 227 Message memory .......................... 233 Vehicle submenu ........................... 225 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel)Settings menu ......................................... 223 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) submenu Factory setting ............................... 228 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Important safety notes .................. 206 Menu overview .............................. 209 Switching daytime driving lights on/off ............................................ 210 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Displaying service messages ......... 305 Display messages .......................... 232 Individual vehicle settings .............. 207 Message memory .......................... 232 Operating ....................................... 207 Range ............................................ 210 Standard display ............................ 209 Trip computer ................................ 210 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 117 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature Display (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 211 Display (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 207 Overhead control panel ...................... 41 P Paint code .......................................... 352 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 307 Index Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 90 Opening/closing .............................. 91 Opening/closing the roller sunblind ................................................. 92 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92 Rain closing feature ......................... 91 Resetting ......................................... 92 Park Assist Parking Guidance ........................... 183 Parking Important safety notes .................. 158 Parking brake ................................ 159 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 104 Reversing camera .......................... 186 see Parking see PARKTRONIC Parking aid see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 240 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 235 Notes/function .............................. 159 see Parking brake Parking Guidance Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 259 Important safety notes .................. 183 Trailer towing ................................. 186 Parking lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 250 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 246 Parking lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 117 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 117 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 182 Driving system ............................... 179 Function/notes ............................. 179 Problem (fault) ............................... 183 Sensor range ................................. 180 Trailer towing ................................. 182 Warning display ............................. 181 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp ...................................................... 57 Petrol .................................................. 153 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 310 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 241 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 236 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Operation ......................................... 50 PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Function/notes ................................ 71 PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 242 Switching on/off ........................... 221 Warning lamp ................................. 282 Preventive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Program selector button .................. 147 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 140 Manual transmission ...................... 139 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26 R RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. Country overview ........................... Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 178 229 226 363 257 17 18 Index Radio Selecting a station (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 217 see separate operating instructions Rain closing feature (panorama sliding sunroof) ................................... 91 Range (fuel) Displaying (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 215 Displaying (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 210 Reading lamp ..................................... 114 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 133 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 54 Rear foglamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 249 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 246 Switching on/off ........................... 109 Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 286 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 104 Dipping (manual) ........................... 103 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 127 Switching on/off ........................... 126 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Important safety notes .................. 152 Refuelling process ......................... 155 see Fuel Releasing the parking lock manually (automatic transmission) ........ 152 Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 129 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 130 Garage door opener ....................... 294 Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... 130 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 253 Warning lamp ................................. 280 Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Rev counter 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 210 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 206 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmission) ............................................... 146 Engaging (manual transmission) .... 145 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 309 Function/notes ............................. 186 Reversing lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 118 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 250 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 246 Roller blind see Roller sunblind Roller sunblind Opening/closing .............................. 92 Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 92 Roof carrier ........................................ 288 Roof load (maximum) see Technical data Route see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 216 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Child restraint systems .................... 55 Safety systems see Driving safety systems Index Seat Seat backrest display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ 268 Seat backrest display message (4button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ 266 Seat belt Activating/deactivating seat-belt adjustment (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 228 Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 53 Belt force limiter .............................. 54 Belt tensioner .................................. 54 Cleaning ......................................... 311 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 242 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 236 Fastening ......................................... 53 Important safety guidelines ............. 51 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 54 Releasing ......................................... 53 Warning lamp (function) ................... 54 Seat belts Warning lamp ................................. 273 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Adjusting (manually and electrically) ................................................ 98 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 99 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98 Cleaning the cover ......................... 311 Correct driver's seat position ........... 96 Folding the backrests forward/ back ................................................. 99 Important safety notes .................... 97 Seat heating problem .................... 100 Seat ventilation problem ................ 101 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 105 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 100 Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. 100 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 309 Service see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Service menu (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .................. 222 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 356 Coolant (engine) ............................ 356 Engine oil ....................................... 355 Fuel ................................................ 354 Important safety notes .................. 353 Settings Factory (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 228 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 223 Setting the air distribution ............... 125 Setting the airflow ............................ 125 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 229 Shifting to neutral (manual transmission) ............................................. 145 Sidebag ................................................ 48 Side marker lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 250 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 246 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 89 Convenience opening ...................... 88 Important safety notes .................... 88 Opening/closing .............................. 88 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90 resetting .......................................... 90 Sliding sunroof see Panorama sliding sunroof Snow chains ...................................... 338 Socket Centre console .............................. 292 Points to observe before use ......... 291 Rear compartment ......................... 292 Spare wheel Storage location ............................ 316 see Emergency spare wheel Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Speed, controlling see Cruise control 19 20 Index Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 220 Displaying ...................................... 220 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 257 Display message in the multifunction display .................................... 189 Important safety notes .................. 189 Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 223 Digital ............................................ 215 In the instrument cluster (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .... 35 In the instrument cluster (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .... 32 Segments ...................................... 211 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 223 see Instrument cluster SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 175 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 261 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 256 Function/notes ............................. 173 Important safety notes .................. 173 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 174 Permanent ..................................... 176 Selecting ........................................ 174 Storing the current speed .............. 175 Variable ......................................... 174 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 69 Warning lamp ................................. 278 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 243 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 237 Introduction ..................................... 45 Warning lamp ................................. 279 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45 Starting (engine) ................................ 138 Station see Radio Steering Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 269 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 267 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 102 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101 Buttons (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 211 Buttons (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 207 Gearshift paddles ........................... 148 Important safety notes .................. 101 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 105 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 148 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 229 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 285 Centre console .............................. 285 Cup holder ..................................... 289 Glove compartment ....................... 285 Important safety information ......... 284 Luggage net ................................... 285 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... 288 Summer opening see Convenience opening feature Summer tyres .................................... 337 Sun visor ............................................ 290 Supplement Restraint System see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Surround lighting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 225 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 73 Index T Tail lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 249 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 245 Tank see Fuel tank Tank content Displaying the range (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 215 Displaying the range (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 210 Fuel gauge (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ......................... 35 Fuel gauge (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ......................... 32 Technical data C 220 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY ........... 359 C 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY ........... 360 C 63 AMG ...................................... 359 Notes ............................................. 350 Trailer loads ................................... 362 Tyres/wheels ................................. 345 Technical Data C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY .................. 357 C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY .................. 358 C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY .................. 358 Telephone Accepting a call ............................. 219 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 269 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 219 Number from the phone book ........ 219 Redialling ....................................... 220 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 219 Telephone compartment ................ 285 Temperature Coolant (12-button multifunction steering wheel; AMG) ..................... 229 Coolant (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 210 Coolant (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 206 Engine oil (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 229 Outside temperature (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 211 Outside temperature (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 207 Setting (climate control) ................ 125 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 162 Through-loading feature ................... 286 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 229 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 317 Top Tether ............................................ 59 Total distance recorder Displaying (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 215 Displaying (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 209 Tow-away protection .......................... 73 Towing Important safety notes .................. 330 With the rear axle raised ................ 332 Towing a trailer Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 197 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 199 Axle load, permissible .................... 363 Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps ............................................. 203 Lights display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 248 Lights display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 244 Trailer tow hitch display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ 266 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 331 Removing the towing eye ............... 332 With both axles on the ground ....... 332 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 333 Fitting the towing eye .................... 331 Important safety notes .................. 330 Removing the towing eye ............... 332 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer towing 7-pin connector ............................. 204 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 192 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 309 21 22 Index Coupling up a trailer ...................... 202 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 202 Driving tips .................................... 199 ESP® ................................................ 70 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 202 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 201 Important safety notes .................. 199 Mounting dimensions .................... 361 Parking Guidance ........................... 186 Parktronic ...................................... 182 Power supply ................................. 203 Shift range ..................................... 147 Trailer loads ................................... 362 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 332 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 311 Trip computer On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 215 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 210 Trip meter Displaying/resetting (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 209 Displaying (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 215 Resetting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 216 Trip odometer see Trip meter Turn signal Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 248 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 245 Turn signals Switching on/off ........................... 110 Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 351 Installation ..................................... 351 Transmission output (maximum) .... 351 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Pressure loss warning .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure monitor Function/notes ............................. Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Tyres Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Grip ................................................ Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... see Flat tyre 342 263 262 319 340 320 339 342 343 282 336 344 263 262 161 336 344 337 344 345 337 U Unladen weight see Technical data Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 85 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 84 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 290 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 27 Data acquisition ............................... 27 Electronics ..................................... 351 Equipment ....................................... 25 Implied warranty .............................. 27 Individual settings .......................... 223 Index Leaving parked up ......................... 159 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 85 Locking (key) ................................... 78 Lowering ........................................ 324 Pulling away ................................... 139 Raising ........................................... 322 Registration ..................................... 26 Towing away .................................. 330 Tow-starting ................................... 330 Transporting .................................. 332 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 85 Unlocking (key) ................................ 78 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data see Technical data Vehicle dimensions see Technical data Vehicle emergency locking ................ 85 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 352 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 315 Vehicle weights see Technical data Vents see Air vents Video (DVD) ........................................ 218 Video DVD (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......................... 218 VIN ...................................................... 352 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 275 Brakes ........................................... 275 Distance warning signal ................. 282 ESP® .............................................. 277 ESP® OFF ....................................... 277 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 162 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 166 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 174 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 57 Reserve fuel ................................... 280 Seat belt ........................................ 273 SRS ................................................ 279 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 282 Warning triangle ................................ 314 Washer fluid Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 267 see Windscreen washer system Weight see Technical data Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 324 Wheel chock ...................................... 321 Wheels Changing/replacing ....................... 344 Changing a wheel .......................... 321 Checking ........................................ 336 Cleaning ......................................... 307 Fitting a wheel ............................... 323 Important safety notes .................. 336 Removing a wheel .......................... 323 Storing ........................................... 344 Tightening torque ........................... 324 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 345 Windowbag Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 244 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 237 Operation ......................................... 49 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 308 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 126 Windscreen washer fluid Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 269 Windscreen washer system ............. 304 Windscreen wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 120 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 119 Switching on/off ........................... 118 Winter operation Important safety notes .................. 337 Slippery road surfaces ................... 162 Snow chains .................................. 338 23 24 Index Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. M+S tyres ...................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 225 337 308 119 119 311 Introduction Protection of the environment Notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Personal driving style: Rmake Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. Ravoid Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Returning end-of-life vehicles Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally responsible manner, in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of up to 3.5 t, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and reuse. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. The options for recycling vehicles and parts are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your MercedesBenz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or your national hotline number. Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. All the systems found in your vehicle Z 25 26 Introduction are listed in the original purchase agreement of your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Operating safety Safety notes G WARNING All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The specialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G WARNING Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, the safety systems of your vehicle may not function correctly and as a result will no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables under coverings, could cause the safety systems of your vehicle to stop working properly. The safety systems would thus no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. installations or modifications, should therefore be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, this equipment could stop working. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic systems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Malfunctions such as these can seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating safety and therefore your own safety. You should therefore have all work and modifications to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the information in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rservice Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles to improve their quality or safety. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle has never been inspected at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, it is possible that your vehicle is not registered in your name with Introduction Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. Data stored in the vehicle Fault data Correct use Components critical for vehicle operation are equipped with fault data memories as standard. There are also data storage devices which record the technical reactions of vehicle components to certain driving situations (e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® intervention). This data is used exclusively to: G WARNING Rassist Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. Observe the following information when using your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual "Technical data" section in this manual Rnational road traffic regulations Rnational road traffic licensing regulations Rthe Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of Daimler AG. in the rectification of faults and defects Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced by MercedesBenz, this technical information can be read out from the fault memory. This is performed by authorised employees of the MercedesBenz service network using special diagnostic computers. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the memory. Other memory data is constantly overwritten. Other devices that store data Depending on the equipment level, your vehicle may feature communications and/or entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devices, telephone systems). These allow you to save and edit data required for the operation of the respective device. Further information on operation (e.g. on deleting data) can be found in the separate operating instructions. Z 27 28 29 30 32 35 38 40 41 42 At a glance Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) ............................................ Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) ................................... Multifunction steering wheel ............. Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 30 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function : Page Automatic transmission: steering wheel gearshift paddles 148 ; Cruise control lever 162 = Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) 207 211 ? Horn A PARKTRONIC warning display B Overhead control panel 41 C Climate control systems 122 D Ignition lock Start/Stop button 137 137 E Adjusts the steering wheel manually 101 F Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 101 G Combination switch 110 H Parking brake 159 179 Function Page I On-board diagnostics connection J Opens the bonnet 301 K Releases the parking brake 159 L Light switch 108 M Headlamp range adjustment 110 31 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 179 = Cruise control lever 162 ? Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) A Horn B Automatic transmission: steering wheel gearshift paddles C D 41 207 211 148 Headlamp range adjustment 110 Light switch 108 Function Page E Releases the parking brake 159 F Opens the bonnet 301 G On-board diagnostics connection H Ignition lock Start/Stop button 137 137 I Adjusts the steering wheel manually 101 J Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 101 K Combination switch 110 L Parking brake 159 M Climate control systems 122 32 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) At a glance Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) Displays and controls i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature = Speedometer ? Rev counter 206 A ECO start/stop function Automatic transmission: Transmission position and drive program Manual transmission: Gearshift recommendation Outside temperature HOLD function Stored limit speed 140 Multifunction display 207 B C 206 146 145 207 177 173 D Time Automatic transmission: Outside temperature (vehicles for the United Kingdom: speed in km/h) HOLD function Stored limit speed Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise Page 207 177 173 33 At a glance Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) i Instrument cluster: miles Function Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature = Speedometer ? Rev counter 206 A ECO start/stop function Automatic transmission: Transmission position and drive program Manual transmission: Gearshift recommendation Outside temperature HOLD function Stored limit speed 140 B Multifunction display 207 C Time Automatic transmission: Outside temperature (vehicles for the United Kingdom: speed in km/h) HOLD function Stored limit speed 207 177 173 206 D 145 207 177 173 Page Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise 34 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page Function Page : Reserve fuel 280 D Engine diagnostics 280 ; Coolant 280 E ESP® 277 = ABS 275 F Rear foglamp 109 ? Brakes 275 G Main-beam headlamps 110 A Seat belt 273 H Dipped-beam headlamps 109 B Turn signal 110 I Front foglamps 109 C SRS 279 J Diesel engine: preglow 139 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) 35 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) At a glance Displays and controls i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature 210 = Speedometer with segments 211 ? Multifunction display 212 A Rev counter 210 B Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) At a glance 36 i Instrument cluster: miles Function Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature 210 = Speedometer with segments 211 ? Multifunction display 212 A Rev counter B Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise Page 210 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) 37 At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function : Page Function Page E Tyre pressure monitor 282 F Seat belt 273 G % Diesel engine: preglow ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 139 H Coolant 280 275 I Rear foglamp 109 Turn signal 110 J Main-beam headlamps 110 B ABS 275 K Dipped-beam headlamps 109 C SRS 279 L Front foglamps 109 D Engine diagnostics 280 M Reserve fuel 280 ÷ ESP® M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles 277 : ESP® 277 ; Distance warning signal 282 = ESP® OFF 277 ? Brakes A 278 278 38 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Multifunction steering wheel 4-button multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio system; see the separate operating instructions = W Increases the volume ? X Decreases the volume A C Scrolls through lists Changes values Confirms display messages Page 207 Function B V Press briefly: Selects a menu Press and hold: Selects the standard display Page Multifunction steering wheel 39 At a glance 12-button multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio system/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute Page 212 Function A B 219 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects the submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms selections and hides display messages % Back or deactivates LINGUATRONIC Page 214 214 40 Centre console At a glance Centre console Function : Page Audio system/COMAND Online; see separate operating instructions Function Page E & Auxiliary heating 128 F Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket 284 290 291 291 ; c Seat heating 100 = s Seat ventilation 100 ? c PARKTRONIC 179 G A ¤ ECO start/stop button Gear lever Selector lever 144 146 140 H £ Hazard warning lamps Stowage compartment Cup holder 284 289 111 I Stowage compartment 284 J Audio/COMAND controller K Selects the drive program B C D 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp M Dynamic driving package with sports mode å AMG vehicles: ESP® 57 176 69 147 Overhead control panel 41 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : ; = ? A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off Page 114 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 114 p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 114 ë Deactivates towaway protection 73 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof with roller sunblinds 91 Function Page B Rear-view mirror C ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 74 p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 114 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 114 D E 103 42 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Page : Opens the door 84 ; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 84 = Adjusts the seat electrically 98 ? r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 105 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 103 A B C W Opens/closes the side windows 88 o Opens the boot lid 87 Useful information .............................. Occupant safety .................................. Children in the vehicle ........................ Driving safety systems ....................... Anti-theft systems .............................. 44 44 55 65 73 Safety 43 44 Occupant safety Useful information Safety i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Occupant safety Important safety notes Seat belts, together with the Supplemental Restraint System – SRS (Y page 45), are complementary, co-ordinated restraint systems. They reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre-defined types of accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, make sure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 96). Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 53). Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if deployed (Y page 46). Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 96). Rthe restraint systems have not been modified. i An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. As such, they are only an additional restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. The airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. For example, if the protective capacity of correctly fastened seat belts is not increased by deploying the airbags, the airbags will not deploy. Airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. Rin a head-on collision, for example, the seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant from being propelled towards the point of impact. It can thus reduce the risk of injury. In accidents in which an airbag is deployed, it provides increased protection only if the seat belt is worn correctly. G WARNING If service work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Moreover, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING G WARNING Modifications to or work performed incorrectly on the following parts can result in the restraint systems not functioning as intended: If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be activated unintentionally or may not be triggered in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. A malfunction has occurred if: Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat belts and their anchorage points, belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags Rthe wiring Rnetworked electronic systems Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to deploy or be triggered in an accident despite the deceleration force being sufficient to trigger the systems, or could be triggered unintentionally. For this reason, never make any modifications to the restraint systems. Therefore, you must not tamper with electronic components or their software. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction SRS consists of: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rairbags Rairbag control unit (with crash sensors) tensioners Rbelt force limiters SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. Rbelt SRS warning lamp SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few seconds. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again. In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags During the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rmagnitude Based on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners in the first stage. i The front belt tensioners can only be trig- gered if the seat belt tongues on the front seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt buckles. If there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front airbags are also deployed. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the event Z 45 Safety Occupant safety Safety 46 Occupant safety of a collision. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process must take place in good time at the start of the collision. i Airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. Also, not all airbags are deployed together in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the collision detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rhead-on collision impact Rrear impact Rside The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affec- ted and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. Airbags Important safety notes Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. The airbag installation locations are identified by the AIRBAG symbol. G WARNING Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag deployment: Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, pregnant women – must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall and under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from Occupant safety Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. Rmake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area where the airbags are deployed. Rdo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example, coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury being caused by an airbag, due to the high speed at which the airbag must be deployed. G WARNING Airbag functionality can only be assured if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: Rpadded steering wheel boss cover below the steering column Rfront-passenger airbag cover Router side of front seat bolsters Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest Rroof frame cover between the front A-pillar and the C-pillar in the rear compartment Rkneebag G WARNING A small amount of powder is released when an airbag is deployed. The powder could cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. In order to prevent breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the interior. The powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. Z Safety the centre of the driver's airbag cover as possible. Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. This is especially important if you have secured a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their heads into the area of the window in which the sidebag/windowbag is deployed. Rrearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger airbag has been disabled. On the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled if a child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a vehicle equipped with automatic child seat recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition, or your rearward-facing child restraint system does not have automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in the pockets of clothing. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's/front-passenger airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. 47 48 Occupant safety Safety G WARNING The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them as you could burn yourself. Have the airbags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Front airbags The front airbags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. out automatic child seat recognition has been fitted or that a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is incorrectly fitted. ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. The system may then detect that the seat is occupied and if there is an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side could be deployed. Have restraint systems that have been triggered replaced. Driver's kneebag i The driver's kneebag is only available in certain countries. The driver's kneebag increases protection of the driver against: Rknee injuries injuries Rlower leg injuries Rthigh Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. They are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently of other airbags in the vehicle Front-passenger airbag ; is only activated if the system determines that the frontpassenger seat is occupied. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is not lit (Y page 57). This means that a child restraint system with- Driver's kneebag : is always deployed along with the driver's airbag and inflates underneath the steering column. Sidebags G WARNING If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the sidebag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. When deployed, the sidebags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Rhead Rneck The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the sidebag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Pelvisbag deployment enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Rarms Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer seat cushions. The sidebags are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners Rat Pelvisbags i Pelvisbags are only available in certain countries. G WARNING If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Pelvisbags : deploy next to and below the outer seat cushions. They are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners Windowbags The windowbags enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area extending from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear sidewall (C-pillar). Z 49 Safety Occupant safety 50 Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. with the memory function: it adjusts the front-passenger seat if it is in an unfavourable position. Rif the vehicle skids, the panorama sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pretensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belts are not released: Safety Rvehicles Windowbags : are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rat PRE-SAFE® protection) (preventative occupant PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS is activated or for vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully Rif the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations (on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceed and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. G WARNING When adjusting the seat, make sure that nobody can become trapped. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. More information about seat-belt adjustment, a convenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat-belt adjustment" section (Y page 53). NECK-PRO head restraints The NECK-PRO head restraints increase protection to the driver's and front passenger's head and neck. To this end, the NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of a certain severity. This provides better head support. Occupant safety 51 Only use head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. The use of non-approved head restraint covers may prevent NECK-PRO head restraints from triggering properly. Consequently, the NECK-PRO head restraints cannot provide the intended level of protection. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre regarding availability. If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and frontpassenger seat (Y page 51). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can recognise when NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints Following a rear-end collision, MercedesBenz recommends that you have NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Safety G WARNING Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. X Seat belts Important safety notes Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body and must not be twisted. Therefore, avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Z Safety 52 Occupant safety The shoulder belt section must be routed across the centre of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. RDo not route the belt strap across sharp edges or fragile objects, especially if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident, and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts properly. Therefore, they should always be secured in a suitable child restraint system on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting a child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection unless the backrest is almost vertical. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G WARNING A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that has been subjected to a load in an accident or which has been modified no longer offers the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Occupant safety Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 96). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your hips. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 53). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X The rear seat belts are equipped with a child seat lock (Y page 56). If you pull out the seat belt fully and then allow the inertia reel to retract it, the child-seat lock is activated. To deactivate the child seat lock, unfasten the seat belt and guide the belt tongue to the belt sash guide. For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" (Y page 53). engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. On vehicles with a luxury multifunction steering wheel (12 buttons), you can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 228). The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE® can be found in the "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection)" section (Y page 50). Releasing seat belts X Press release button ? (Y page 53) and guide belt tongue ; back towards belt sash guide :. i If you have guided the seat belt back, it is turned 180 °. This is necessary in order to guarantee that the seat belt is not twisted and that it is routed correctly when the belt is fastened. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Safety Fastening seat belts 53 Safety 54 Occupant safety Belt warning for driver and front passenger You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 232). The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver or the front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. i The status indicator for the rear-compart- i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 273). Rear seat belt status indicator The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator tells you if the rear passengers have their seat belts fastened. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator indicates the rear seat on which the belt is fastened. The ü symbol in the display indicates a fastened seat belt. If a seat belt is not fastened or if a seat is not occupied, the ý symbol is displayed. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator appears in the multifunction display for around 30 seconds if: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and the vehicle drives off again. ment seat belts is only available for certain countries. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags. They take on a part of the deceleration force, resulting in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area. The belt tensioners can only be activated when: Rthe ignition is switched on. restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 45). Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the three-point seat belts in the front. The belt tensioners on the seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The belt tensioners are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident: Rthe Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col- lision, the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side opposite the impact the vehicle deceler- ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction When the belt tensioners are triggered, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. G WARNING If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occu- pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident. Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems Important safety notes G WARNING To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children. Rdo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under twelve years of age on the frontpassenger seat. Exception: the vehicle is equipped with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat and the child is secured in a child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition. Rif you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces which occur in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G WARNING The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. Child restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. Children are generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. Therefore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. We recommend the use of child restraint systems which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which Z 55 Safety Children in the vehicle Safety 56 Children in the vehicle is appropriate to the size, age and weight of the child and recommended for MercedesBenz vehicles. You should preferably fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Make sure that the child is secured in a child restraint system throughout the trip. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed at (Y page 63). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. They could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could burn herself/himself on them. If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. Also observe the notes on HOLD. Relevant information can be found in the index. G WARNING Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads increase the risk of injury for children and all other occupants in the event of: Ran accident braking manoeuvre Ra sudden change of direction Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the vehicle interior unless they are secured. You will Ra find further information under "Loading guidelines" in the index. Child seat lock The seat belts on the rear seats are fitted with a child seat lock. When enabled, the childseat lock function ensures that the belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia reel. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. X Activating the child seat lock: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The child-seat lock function is enabled. X Push down on the child restraint system to take up any slack. X Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the child seat lock: Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The child-seat lock function is deactivated. X Children in the vehicle Child seat on the front-passenger seat 57 The front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat Rin vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat, if no special child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat has been fitted Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 4 is not lit. To make you aware of this danger, a corresponding warning sticker has been affixed on the dashboard and on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat G WARNING If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seriously and even fatally injured by the frontpassenger airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when it deploys. Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. 1 If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition1 on the front-passenger seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly but has no function. It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. Z Safety Ron 58 Children in the vehicle system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. i If the front-passenger airbag is disabled Safety by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the frontpassenger side: Rthe sidebag pelvisbag Rthe windowbag Rthe belt tensioner Rthe The front-passenger seat sensor system for child restraint systems detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In such cases, PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 4: lights up. The front-passenger airbag is disabled. G WARNING If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger airbag has not been disabled. If the frontpassenger airbag deploys, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rfit or Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint G WARNING Do not place electronic devices on the frontpassenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, when switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access cards Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This can lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp to light up without there being a child seat with transponders for automatic child seat recognition fitted. The front-passenger airbag will not then deploy during an accident. It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. Rmobile ISOFIX child seat securing system for the rear seats ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats. Children in the vehicle A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system using a three-point seat belt. aged or subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The securing rings on the rear seats are covered by an upholstered lining. G WARNING The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. For reasons of safety, only use child restraint systems with the ISOFIX child seat securing system on the rear seats. We recommend that you use the ISOFIX child restraint systems that have been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, always make sure that it is engaged correctly in the securing rings on both sides. Fold upholstery cover ; and the Velcro fastener down. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint systems on both securing rings :. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the ISOFIX child restraint system. X Top Tether Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. G WARNING Please note that if child restraint systems, or their retaining systems, are damaged or subjected to a load in an accident, they may not be able to provide their protective function. This could result in serious or even fatal injuries to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages which have been damZ Safety G WARNING 59 Children in the vehicle Safety 60 Press down the rear of cover ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover ; is raised slightly at the front. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Route Top Tether belts A on the left and right past head restraint :. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight. X Children in the vehicle 61 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. G Risk of injury There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/ or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you switch the ignition on. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g. Rlaptop Rmobile phone Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems Key to the letters used in the table: X U Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category. Suitable for child restraint systems in the Universal category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 63). Z Safety Problems with child seat recognition Children in the vehicle 62 Safety Seat positions Weight catego- Front-passenger seat ries FrontThe frontpassenger air- passenger airbag is not disa- bag is disabled: bled2 Rear seat Group 0: up to 10 kg X U3, L3 U, L Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U3, L3 U, L Group I: 9 to 18 kg U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L Group II: 15 to 25 kg U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L Group III: 22 to 36 kg U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L Left, right "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. Approval label on the child restraint system (example) Key to the letters used in the table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 63). Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the "Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 3 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and the seat backrest to a position as close to vertical as possible. 2 Children in the vehicle 63 Suitability of the rear seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 IL 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL4 I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL4 B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF Safety Weight categories Recommended child restraint systems If you fit a child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition to the front-passenger seat, position the front-passenger seat in its rearmost position. 4 Weight catego- Manufacries turer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order num- Automatic ber child seat (A 000 ...) recognition Group 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 Yes Group 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 Yes Adjust the front-passenger seat to the central upper position and the seat backrest to a position as close to vertical as possible. Z Safety 64 Children in the vehicle Weight catego- Manufacries turer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order num- Automatic ber child seat (A 000 ...) recognition Group I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years DUO PLUS 03 301133 04 301133 970 11 00 Yes 970 16 00 No KIDFIX 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes 970 19 00 No Britax Römer Category II/III: Britax 15 to 36 kg Römer between approximately 4 and 12 years Suggested ISOFIX child restraint systems from the Universal category. Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number Automatic child seat recognition Carry-cot F – – – – – G – – – – – E – – – – – Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 B6 6 86 ISOFIX 8224 PLUS No D – – – – – C – – – – – Group I: D 9 to 18 kg C – – – – – – – – – – B – – – – – Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: E up to 13 kg Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type B1 Britax Römer DUO PLUS 03 301133 A 000 970 04 301133 11 00 Yes A – – – Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) RBAS (Brake Assist System) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*) RAdaptive brake lamps RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE RPRE-SAFE® Brake Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions, as well as the traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. i Please note that the driving safety sys- tems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Automatic child seat recognition regarding tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tyres" section (Y page 336). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. Z 65 Safety Driving safety systems 66 Driving safety systems Safety You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Braking If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. G WARNING Do not depress the brake pedal several times in quick succession (pumping). Pumping the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. You might otherwise not be able to stop the vehicle in time and could cause an accident. Depress the brake pedal firmly and smoothly. BAS (Brake Assist) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. G WARNING If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, braking force is not automatically increased in emergency braking sit- uations and the stopping distance may increase. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds of over 30 km/h and uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles, for example, stopped or parked vehicles. Should you approach an obstacle and BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision, BAS PLUS calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you apply the brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS can automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. BAS PLUS is then deactivated. Rthere Vehicles with COMAND and navigation system: the radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 363). Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation system and vehicles for Australia: the radar sensor system and on-board computer must be switched off in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 226). For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational; see "Radar sensor system" in the index. G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. If BAS PLUS is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. Adaptive brake lamps i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in certain countries. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning switch button (Y page 111). ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Important safety notes i See the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. Z 67 Safety Driving safety systems 68 Driving safety systems If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. Safety G WARNING If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. Radapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Otherwise, the vehicle could go into a skid. Rdo ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. ! Switch the ignition off when: Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) You cannot activate and deactivate ESP® on vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. i Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a stop. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Rthe parking brake is being tested using a It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front/ Rwhen dynamometer rear axle raised Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. ETS (Electronic Traction Support) Traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. G WARNING Traction control cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. Traction control cannot override the laws of physics. using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin G WARNING Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. Driving safety systems To deactivate:(Y page 221). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. G WARNING ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rthe engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. To activate:(Y page 221). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations: using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Otherwise, you should only use SPORT handling mode on designated race circuits. X To activate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Rwhen Rin G WARNING Deactivate SPORT handling mode and activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. Otherwise, SPORT handling mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Activating/deactivating ESP® ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin Z Safety X 69 Driving safety systems Safety 70 G WARNING G WARNING Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available and is also not activated if you brake firmly with the assistance of ESP®. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available and is also not activated if you brake firmly with the assistance of ESP®. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. X To activate: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON message appears in the multifunction display. ESP® trailer stabilisation ESP® trailer stabilisation is not available in AMG vehicles. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. In this situation, ESP® assists you and can detect if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised. Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. G WARNING X To deactivate: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷OFF message appears in the multifunction display. If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the trailer from swerving and will thus be unable to reduce the risk of an accident. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. X Observe the notes on warning and indicator lamps (Y page 275) as well as display messages (Y page 235) (4-button multifunction steering wheel) and (Y page 240) (12button multifunction steering wheel). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 177) and hill start assist (Y page 140). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 159). PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 65). PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. This function will issue a warning at speeds of around 30 km/h or more if: Rfor a period of several seconds, the distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the speed at which you are travelling. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Ryou are rapidly approaching the vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. If the driver and passengers have fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also can also perform the following at speeds of above approximately 30 km/h: Rbrake the vehicle automatically from a speed of up to approximately 200 km/h Rtrigger preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) (Y page 50) Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. To end this, you can either depress the accelerator pedal further, activate kickdown or release the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou drive slower than approximately 15 km/h. Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. Z 71 Safety Driving safety systems 72 Driving safety systems Safety Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, PRE-SAFE® Brake may also detect stationary obstacles, for example stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or take evasive action, the system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated (Y page 50). If the risk of collision remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident that can no longer be avoided. G WARNING Even if PRE-SAFE® Brake slows the vehicle before an imminent rear-end collision, the system cannot avert a collision without the intervention of the driver. There is a risk of an accident. Brake according to the situation or take evasive action. Delayed intervention by the driver can lead to an accident. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may not give warnings or intervene in critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 221). The Ä symbol appears in the multifunction display as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 177). On vehicles with parking guidance, the Ä symbol is displayed when P is engaged or you are driving faster than 35 km/h. Anti-theft systems Anti-theft systems The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Safety Vehicles with COMAND and navigation system: the radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 363). Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation system and vehicles for Australia: the radar sensor system and on-board computer must be switched off in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 226). For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on (Y page 226) and be operational. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X X Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. X To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet Rthe 73 To stop the alarm using the key: insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Tow-away protection An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This occurs if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Z Anti-theft systems 74 To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is deactivated automatically. Safety X To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection manually if your vehicle: Ris being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Deactivating: Ris X Remove the key from the ignition lock. ment is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked. This occurs if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. To activate: Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed. Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X To switch off: X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated automatically. To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle. side windows remain open. Rthe panorama sliding sunroof remains open. Deactivating: Rthe Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. X X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again. door is opened and closed again. Rthe vehicle is locked again. Ra Interior motion sensor If the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move- Anti-theft systems X 75 Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. Safety The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again. door is opened and closed again. Rthe vehicle is locked again. Ra i UK only: Your vehicle is equipped with a double lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key (Y page 84). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before locking the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 83). Z 76 77 78 78 83 85 88 90 Opening and closing Useful information .............................. Key ....................................................... Doors .................................................... Boot ...................................................... Side windows ...................................... Sliding sunroof .................................... 78 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Key Key functions Locking and unlocking centrally The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap Rthe G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. As a result, they could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the weight acting on the key could cause it to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the steering wheel. This could cause the engine to be switched off suddenly. You may lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to the key that is inserted in the ignition. : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the boot lid = % To unlock the vehicle When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 225). Key X If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: If you pull on the handle of the boot lid, only the boot of the vehicle is unlocked. Rthe vehicle is locked again. anti-theft system is primed again. X To lock centrally: press the & button. KEYLESS-GO You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. When you touch the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's outside door handles, KEYLESS-GO establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key. When the engine is started and whilst you are driving, KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a valid key is in the vehicle by periodically establishing radio contact. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the door handle you wish to lock or unlock must not be greater than 1 m. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 81) flashes twice. i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button locks or unlocks the vehicle. The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the front-passenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X Z Opening and closing To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period (Y page 89). You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked or unlocked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 226). X To unlock centrally: press the % button. Rthe 79 Key 80 Restoring the factory settings Opening and closing X Removing the emergency key element Press the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To turn the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key in the ignition lock. X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. Key battery Important safety notes It is advisable to have batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING Batteries are toxic and contain caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled in an environmentally responsible manner. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special col- Key Checking the battery X Press the & or % button. The key battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. If battery check lamp : does not light up briefly during the test, the key battery is discharged. X Changing the battery (Y page 81) i If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button locks or unlocks the vehicle. Changing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 80). Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Z Opening and closing lection point for old batteries. 81 82 Key Problems with the key Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button. Opening and closing Problem If this does not work: X Check the key battery and replace it if necessary (Y page 81). X Lock (Y page 85) or unlock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. The key is faulty. X Lock (Y page 85) or unlock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button. There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work: X Check the key battery and replace it if necessary (Y page 81). X Lock (Y page 85) or unlock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. You have lost a key. Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the key. The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 325). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 329). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using the key. The steering lock is mechanically blocked. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily. started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The key is in the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. As a result, they could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Z 83 Opening and closing Doors Doors 84 Opening and closing Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor (Y page 74) before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. Automatic locking feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out when: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. Rthe X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. i It is only possible to lock the vehicle cen- trally if the front-passenger door is closed. To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X On vehicles with a luxury multifunction steering wheel, you can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking via the on-board computer (Y page 226). Boot If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 80). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. down the locking knob by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 80). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Opening and closing Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the boot lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 84). X Check whether the locking knob on the front-passenger door is still visible. Press 85 Boot Important safety notes Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. G WARNING Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid is always closed when the engine is running. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. Z Boot 86 i You will find details of the boot lid opening dimensions in the Technical data section (Y page 360). The boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Rlocked separately Runlocked with the emergency key element Opening and closing Ropened Pull the boot lid down using recess :. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key (Y page 78) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 79). i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the boot, the boot lid cannot be locked and then opens again. X Opening automatically from outside Important safety notes Opening/closing manually Opening X Press the % button on the key. X Pull handle :. Raise the boot lid. X Closing G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the boot lid. G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. As a result, they could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i You will find details of the boot lid opening dimensions in the Technical data section (Y page 360). Opening You can open the boot lid automatically using the key or the handle in the boot lid. Boot Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. or X If the boot is unlocked, pull on the boot lid handle and let it go again immediately. Opening automatically from inside You can open the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Remove the emergency key element. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Unlocking the boot (emergency key element) ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. X To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid opens. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 80). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. Locking the boot separately In some countries, you can lock the boot separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the boot lid. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 80). Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Z Opening and closing X 87 88 Side windows Side windows Important safety notes Opening and closing the side windows Opening and closing G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame when a side window is opened. Do not touch or lean against the side window during the opening procedure. You could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves down. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or pull the switch upwards to close the side window again. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or press it again to open the side window again. G WARNING Children may injure themselves if they open or close the side windows. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures If children open a door, they could: Rbe Rseriously or even fatally injure other people Rget out of the vehicle and injure themselves, or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle : Left ; Right The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the frontpassenger door. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. i You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Convenience opening feature You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock Ropen the vehicle the side windows Side windows roller sunblind Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat i The convenience opening feature can With KEYLESS-GO: Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han- dle. Rpull the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof open. only be operated using the key. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the panorama sunroof are in the desired position. X If the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first. X Press and hold the % button again until the panorama sliding sunroof is in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Using the key i The key must be close to the driver's door handle. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof closes. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Convenience closing feature General notes When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows Rclose the panorama sliding sunroof On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, you can then close the roller sunblind. Using KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: With the key: Rrelease the & button. Rpress and hold the % button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof open again. Z Opening and closing Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof and the 89 Sliding sunroof 90 Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Opening and closing X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof closes. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if a side window can no longer be closed fully. X Close all the doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 88). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 88). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Problems with the side windows Problem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. Sliding sunroof Important safety notes In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when opening and closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch immediately. During automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction to stop the sliding sunroof. Sliding sunroof Children could injure themselves if they operate the sliding sunroof. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Operating the panorama sliding sunroof Opening and closing Opening and closing G WARNING G WARNING The glass in the panorama sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. 91 Overhead control panel : To raise ; Opening = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Push or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. X Rain closing feature When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. i If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. Z Sliding sunroof 92 The panorama sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport). Opening and closing Rit Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama sliding sunroof General notes The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be opened and closed when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you open or close the roller sunblind. Opening and closing closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind if the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind does not move smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the roller sunblind is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 91) and the roller sunblind (Y page 92) can be fully opened again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. ! If the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ X Problems with the sliding sunroof In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the anti-entrap- Sliding sunroof 93 ment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. Opening and closing X If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Z 94 95 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information .............................. 96 Correct driver's seat position ............ 96 Seats .................................................... 97 Steering wheel .................................. 101 Mirrors ............................................... 103 Memory functions ............................. 105 96 Correct driver's seat position Useful information Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Correct driver's seat position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly (Y page 98). When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 101). X Check whether steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjust the steering wheel manually (Y page 101) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 102) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 97). X Check whether you have adjusted seat = properly. Manual and electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98) Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98) When adjusting the seat, make sure: Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 51). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 53). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) Rbe Seats G WARNING Seats Make sure that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint. If your head is not supported correctly by the head restraint, you could suffer a severe neck injury in the event of an accident. Never drive if the head restraints are not engaged and set correctly. Important safety notes G WARNING G WARNING A seat belt can only offer its intended degree of protection when the backrest is almost vertical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid seat positions that do not allow the seat belt to be routed correctly. Adjust the backrest so that it is as upright as possible. Never travel with the backrest reclined too far backwards. You could otherwise be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or sudden braking. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could adjust the seats and become trapped. G WARNING Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or others could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could unintentionally press the buttons to electrically adjust the seats and become trapped. Take care that: Rwhile moving the seats, your hands do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. Rchildren in the vehicle do not slide their hands under the levers. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when adjusting the seats. Observe the notes on airbags. Secure children as recommended; see the "Children in the vehicle" section. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (Y page 105). 97 Seats 98 i Vehicles without the through-loading fea- ture: the head restraints cannot be removed from the rear compartment seats. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information. Adjusting the seat electrically i Related topics: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors RRear bench seat through-loading feature Adjusting the seats manually and electrically : Head restraint height ; Seat cushion angle = Seat height ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment A Backrest angle i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- SAFE® has been triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position. : Backrest angle ; Seat height = Seat cushion angle ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release lever ? again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X Seat cushion angle X Turn handwheel = in the desired direction. To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Seats 99 Adjusting the head restraints electrically To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 98) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Folding the front-seat backrests forward/back Important safety notes G WARNING Make sure that the backrest engages fully. If the backrest is not engaged, the message: Front right seat backrest not locked or Front left seat backrest not locked appears in the multifunction display. Stop the vehicle as soon as road and traffic conditions permit and remove any objects that are blocking the backrest. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when moving the seat. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, press the seat adjustment switch on the door. Folding the backrest forwards With the EASY-ENTRY feature, the seat moves forwards if you have folded the backrest forwards and the seat is in the rear half of the adjustment range. This makes it easier for passengers to get into and out of the rear compartment. The head restraint also lowers on vehicles with electric seat adjustment. Vehicles without memory function: release the head restraint if necessary and push it down. X Pull seat release handle : forwards and fold the backrest forwards until the seat backrest engages. X Push the seat as far forwards as it will go. X Vehicles with memory function: pull seat release handle : forwards and fold the backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat moves automatically to the foremost position. X Folding back the backrest Vehicles without memory function: push the seat backrest back horizontally until the seat reaches the position that was previously set. X Fold the seat backrest backwards until you hear it engage. Do so in a smooth manner. X After the seat backrest has been folded back, check the position of the head restraint and set it to the correct position. X Vehicles with memory function: swing back the seat backrest. The seat moves automatically to the stored position. X Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 100 Seats : To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level 3 may result in excessive seat temperatures. The health of passengers that have limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating level 3 repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Problems with the seat heating The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switching on/off The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. Driver's and front-passenger seat Steering wheel 101 Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X i You can open the front side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 88). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. X Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result, you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unintentional movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. Adjusting the steering wheel manually To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Problems with the seat ventilation The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, as they could become trapped if the steering wheel is adjusted. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING 102 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Do not keep the memory function position button pressed down, otherwise the memory function will start and the steering wheel and seat will begin to move. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY feature and become trapped. Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards if you: : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) i Related topics: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 102) RStoring settings (Y page 105) EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 228). G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure: Rpress the steering column adjustment button. Rbriefly press one of the memory function position buttons. The steering column stops moving immediately. Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Ropen i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. If you insert the key into the ignition lock with the driver's door closed, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if: Rthe Ryou driver's door is closed insert the key into the ignition lock or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. If you close the driver's door with the key inserted into the ignition lock, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored after each manual setting or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 105). Mirrors 103 Mirrors Rear-view mirror Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, to the right or to the left until the exterior mirror is set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. X X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) 104 Mirrors i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Setting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 228). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 228): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door. i The mirrors do not fold out if they have Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors G WARNING If incident light from headlamps is prevented from striking the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then blind you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions and, as a result, you may cause an accident. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. been folded in manually. Exterior mirror out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press the mirror-folding button (Y page 103) repeatedly until you hear the mirror engage in position. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 103). Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Memory functions i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. i You can also store the parking position using memory button M ?. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position which allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side with the corresponding button (Y page 103). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. X The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory functions Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides G WARNING The memory function can still be used when the key has been removed. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when adjusting the seat or the steering wheel. G WARNING Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and as a result cause an accident. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. X 105 Memory functions Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 106 Adjust the seat (Y page 98). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 102) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103). X Press memory button M and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. 107 108 108 114 114 118 Lights and windscreen wipers Useful information ............................ Exterior lighting ................................ Interior lighting ................................. Changing bulbs ................................. Windscreen wipers ........................... Exterior lighting 108 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelligent Light System) are not available. Light switch Operation Lights and windscreen wipers i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Exterior lighting Important safety notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Notes on driving abroad Convert to symmetrical dipped beam when driving abroad: switch the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries (Y page 224). Convert to asymmetrical dipped beam after returning: convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border when returning (Y page 224). 5 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4à Automatic headlamp mode/daytime driving lights 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps BR Rear foglamp CN Foglamps5 The turn signals, main-beam headlamps and the headlamp flasher are operated using the combination switch (Y page 110). ! Switch off the side lamps and parking lamp when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 Ropen Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function. Exterior lighting When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Daytime driving lights You can activate or deactivate the daytime driving lights function using the on-board computer (Y page 224). X To activate the daytime driving lights: you can activate the daytime driving lights function using the on-board computer (vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel). X Turn the light switch to Ã. When the engine is on: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the parking and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Automatic headlamp mode X 6 To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. With the engine running: depending on the brightness of the ambient light, the daytime driving lights6 or the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically. G WARNING If the light switch is set to Ã, the dippedbeam headlamps will not come on automatically if it is foggy. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to L in fog. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Foglamps and rear foglamp Front foglamps Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function. G WARNING If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to L before you start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle may not be visible and you could endanger yourself and others. To switch on the front foglamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to T, L or Ã. X Press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the front foglamps: press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Rear foglamp X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. Only if daytime driving lights have been activated via the on-board computer. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Dipped-beam headlamps 109 Exterior lighting 110 Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Lights and windscreen wipers Vehicles with front foglamps: when the light switch is in the T position, the rear foglamp can only be switched on if the foglamps (without dipped-beam headlamps) are switched on. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated ten times while the lights are on and the engine is running (Y page 118). When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Combination switch Turn signals Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X Headlamp range control g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied 1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied, boot laden 3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu- pied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer Start the engine. X Turn headlamp range control to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. X Main-beam headlamps To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Exterior lighting Headlamp flasher only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of over 10 km/h again after full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Intelligent Light System Active light function To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Hazard warning lamps The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Cornering light function Ran airbag is deployed. vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, Rthe Z Lights and windscreen wipers Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X 111 112 Exterior lighting The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif Lights and windscreen wipers you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h, the cornering light function is activated either by the turn signal or by the steering wheel being turned. Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h, the cornering light function is activated by the steering wheel being turned. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Extended range foglamps Motorway mode Motorway mode increases the range of the beam. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for 1,000 m Rif you are driving at speeds above 130 km/h Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp following activation Adaptive Highbeam Assist You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the main-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Exterior lighting 113 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster stays on. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vision and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or deactivated: Rif To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 225). X Turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 110). The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 45 km/h: the headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above 55 km/h and no other road users are recognised: the main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 45 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: the main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ X there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rif the area of the windscreen around the optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered up, e.g. by a sticker The system may not recognise the following road users: Rroad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedes- trians users that have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rroad users whose lighting is not clearly visible, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier Ron rare occasions: road users that have lights that may be recognised too late or not at all The automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated, or they may be activated despite road users travelling in front of or approaching the vehicle. Thus, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Always observe traffic conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights manually. Rroad Headlamps misted up inside The headlamps may mist up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. Z Lights and windscreen wipers G WARNING Changing bulbs 114 X Drive with the headlamps switched on. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on/off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 225). Ropen Lights and windscreen wipers Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Manual interior lighting control To switch the interior lighting on/off: press the c button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. X : u To switch the rear interior lighting ; = ? A on/off | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off p To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off c To switch the front interior lighting on/off p To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control Important notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Changing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs, you can recognise this by the following: the cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be Changing bulbs G DANGER Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from xenon bulbs. Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when fitting. Only use bulbs of the correct type. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. G WARNING Bulbs and lights can become very hot. For this reason, allow them to cool down before changing them. Otherwise, you could burn yourself when you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage them, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. Halogen bulbs are pressurised and could explode when you change them, especially if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Halogen headlamps : Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W ; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Z Lights and windscreen wipers observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. 115 Changing bulbs 116 Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. Lights and windscreen wipers X Bi-xenon headlamps : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W Tail lamps : Reversing lamp: P 21 W ; Brake lamp: P 21 W = Brake lamp/tail lamp: P 21 W Changing the front bulbs Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) X X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. Main-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Changing bulbs Side lamps/parking lamps (halogen headlamps) 117 Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Changing the rear bulbs Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull out bulb holder ;. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ;. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Cornering light function (Intelligent Light System) You must open the side trim panel in the boot and remove the first-aid kit before you can change the bulbs in the tail lamps. Example: right-hand side trim panel To open: loosen side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X X Left-hand side trim panel (vehicles with a sound system or trailer coupling) Z Lights and windscreen wipers Opening and closing the side trim panels Windscreen wipers 118 To open: turn rotary catch : 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove side trim panel ;. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn release knob : 90° in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the boot. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 117). X Lights and windscreen wipers X Press the respective bulb :, ; or = back and turn it anti-clockwise to remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the connector for LED light functions in the bulb holder. X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it in place. X Insert the tail lamp connector. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 117). X Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off Remove the tail lamp connector Simultaneously press retaining lugs : in the direction of the arrow and slightly pull out the bulb holder with the bulbs. X Remove the connector for LED light functions from the top of the bulb holder. X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs. X X G WARNING The windscreen will not longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. : reversing lamp ; brake lamp = Side lamp/brake lamp Windscreen wipers 119 Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low7 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high8 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the windscreen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wiper to wipe more frequently. 7 8 ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades replaced by a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Replacing the wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock or turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Rain sensor set to low sensitivity. Rain sensor set to high sensitivity. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off Windscreen wipers 120 Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The spray nozzles are misaligned Lights and windscreen wipers X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Fitting the wiper blades X Push the new wiper blade onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Problems with the windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers are obstructed Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers are inoperative The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. The windscreen washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the centre of the windscreen. The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. 121 122 122 124 132 Climate control Useful information ............................ Overview of climate control systems ................................................... Operating the climate control system ..................................................... Adjusting the air vents ..................... 122 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified Climate control specialist workshops (Y page 26). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes G WARNING Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could mist up. This may obstruct your view of the traffic situation and, as a result, you may cause an accident. THERMATIC automatic climate control controls the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances from the air. THERMATIC automatic climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when you drive with the side windows and panorama sliding sunroof closed. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 88). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i It is possible that the residual heat func- tion may be activated automatically an hour after the key is removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the airconditioning system. Overview of climate control systems 123 Climate control Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 125) ; Demists the windscreen (Y page 126) = Activates/deactivates the ZONE function (Y page 125) ? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124) A Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 126) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 125) C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 127) D Sets the air distribution (Y page 125) E Increases the airflow (Y page 125) F Reduces the airflow (Y page 125) G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 124) H Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 124) Notes on using THERMATIC automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of THERMATIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Z Operating the climate control system 124 Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off Important information i When climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only select this setting briefly. Otherwise, the windows may mist up. more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when THERMOTRONIC is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. i The cooling with air dehumidification function uses refrigerant R134a. This coolant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer. i Switch on climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 124). Climate control Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press button ^. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification Important information The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. G WARNING If the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up Activating/deactivating To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To switch off: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. X Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function When you press the ¿ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. Operating the climate control system X a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister, centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. To switch off: press the _ button. or X Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Setting the temperature Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn controls : and B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 123). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. X X Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents and the footwell air vents ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents Setting the airflow Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the K or I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off X To switch on: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. When the buttons for temperature, airflow or air distribution are activated, the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the other climate control zones. X To switch off: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Z Climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X 125 Operating the climate control system 126 The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the demisting function (Y page 126). X Demisting the windscreen You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. i You should only select the demisting i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. function until the windscreen is clear again. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Climate control X Rcooling with air dehumidification on airflow9 Rhigh temperature9 Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rhigh X To switch off: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Turn temperature control : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 123). or X Press the K or I button. 9 Depending on the outside temperature. Windows misted up on the outside Activate the windscreen wipers. Press the _ button repeatedly until the O or P symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X X Rear window heating Activating/deactivating G WARNING Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could endanger you and others. The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. as it only switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Operating the climate control system The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating is activated again automatically. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. G WARNING Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. X i In the event of high pollution levels or at high outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To switch off: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Make sure that all objects and body parts are clear of the side windows when they are being opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the W switch to move the side window in the opposite direction. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the panorama sliding sunroof is opened and closed. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the 3 switch to move the panorama sliding sunroof in the opposite direction. X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof have opened. The side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows or the pan- orama sliding sunroof manually after closing with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Z Climate control Problems with the rear window heating 127 128 Operating the climate control system Auxiliary heating Important safety notes G WARNING Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. Climate control G WARNING When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of the vehicle may become very hot, and highly inflammable material such as fuels could be ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Before switching on Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the temperature. X The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated even when the climate control is being controlled manually. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 227). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console button i Switch on the auxiliary heating regularly, e.g. for about ten minutes every month. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Button on the centre console The colours of the indicator lamps on the button have the following meanings: Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on Red Auxiliary heating switched on Yellow Departure time preselected (Y page 227) Operating the climate control system 129 Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Rsolid i The optimum range can be achieved if you hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the battery in the remote control is low. Replace the remote control battery (Y page 130). Auxiliary heating remote control : Display ; . To check the status/set the depar- ture time = ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation ? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , To check the status/set the depar- ture time Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the , or . button. The following messages can appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. Z Climate control Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : goes out. 130 Operating the climate control system The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. Climate control The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. Setting a departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. Activating a set departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. Deactivating a set departure time X Press the , or . button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. The display message OFF appears in the display. Replacing the remote control battery One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;. X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Operating the climate control system 131 Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. Climate control X Z 132 Adjusting the air vents Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. $ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. Climate control FAIL © FAIL There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating is faulty. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rnever cover the vents or air inlets in the vehicle interior. i For virtually draught-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the centre position. Adjusting the air vents Setting the centre air vents 133 flow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. ! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- cle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. : Centre air vent, left ; Centre air vent, right Climate control = Centre vent thumbwheel, right ? Centre vent thumbwheel, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down. Setting the side air vents : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or anti-clockwise. Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the centre vents in the rear compartment X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right. i Side window demister vent : is never completely shut, even if side air vent ; is shut. Setting the glove compartment air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of air- : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear-compartment air vent, left Z Adjusting the air vents 134 Climate control X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. Useful information ............................ Running-in notes ............................... Driving ............................................... Manual transmission ........................ Automatic transmission ................... Refuelling ........................................... Parking ............................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving systems ................................ Trailer towing .................................... 136 136 136 144 145 152 158 159 162 199 Driving and parking 135 136 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Running-in notes Important safety notes G WARNING New brake pads/linings only have optimal braking performance after several hundred kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. This also applies when brake pads/linings or brake discs have been changed. The first 1,500 km The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RTherefore, drive at varying speeds and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid heavy loads on the engine during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, at the latest when the rev counter needle is 2/3 of the way to the red area in the rev counter display. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transmission: RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance (kickdown). ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: Rdo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. Ronly i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. AMG vehicles with rear axle locking differential Your vehicle is fitted with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil after a running-in period of 3,000 km to improve protection of the rear axle differential. This oil change extends the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Do not place any objects in the driver's footwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's footwell, make sure that it is correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. Loose objects or the floormats could otherwise get caught between the pedals if you Driving Key positions Key Driving and parking accelerate or brake suddenly. You will then not be able to brake, declutch or accelerate as intended. This could lead to accidents and injury. G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil tempera- tures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. 137 g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine If the key is at position 0 in the ignition lock for a longer period, it can no longer be turned in the ignition lock. The steering is then locked. To unlock it, remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. The steering wheel is locked when the key is removed from the ignition lock. i If the key does not belong to the vehicle it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. Z Driving 138 Driving and parking If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. X i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactivated. X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. i If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position and the driver's door is open, the power supply is deactivated again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time before you can use Start/Stop button :. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cat- alytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. Manual transmission Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X i You can only start the engine when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. Automatic transmission X the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the key i To start the engine using the key instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 137) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 137). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 137) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. i Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion: you can also use the touch-start function. To do this, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 137) and release it immediately. The engine then starts automatically. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine G WARNING Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEYLESS-GO key. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 137) once. The engine starts. X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 137) once. Preglow is activated and the engine starts. X Pulling away Manual transmission Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 159). X Release the brake pedal. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. X ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. i Follow the shift recommendations in the multifunction display for an economical driving style (Y page 145). i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 226). i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting Z 139 Driving and parking Driving Driving Driving and parking 140 Automatic transmission Hill start assist will not function if: i It is only possible to shift the transmission Ryou from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the selector lever lock released. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 159). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 226). are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function General notes The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when you pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. After approximately one second, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. i Once you have taken your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around one second. X Pull away. Example: ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled (Y page 141), ECO symbol : is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions are fulfilled, ECO symbol : is shown in yellow. If the ECO start/stop function is deactivated (Y page 142), ECO symbol : is not shown. G WARNING If the engine is switched off and the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the engine has been switched off auto- Driving can be switched off with the ECO button (Y page 142). Vehicles with manual transmission ! Always switch the ignition off and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. Automatic engine switch-off The engine is only switched off if: Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe vehicle is not being steered. Rthe driver's door is closed and the seat belt is fastened. Rthe i The engine can be switched off automat- ically a maximum of four times (initial stop and three repeats) in succession. The ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. The engine can only be switched off automatically again when the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. i During an automatic engine switch-off, air The ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically at low speeds. Brake the vehicle until it comes to a standstill. X Engage neutral N(Y page 145) (follow gearshift instruction : to engage neutral N, if necessary). X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off automatically. X Vehicles with automatic transmission The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill and the brake remains depressed with the transmission in position D or N. i You can still activate HOLD when the vehi- cle is stationary, even if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine must be started first. conditioning is reduced. If full air conditioning is required, the ECO start/stop function Z Driving and parking matically. All of the vehicle's systems remain active. If you open the door, unfasten your seat belt or remove your foot from the brake pedal, the engine will automatically start. The vehicle may begin moving. You could suffer serious or even fatal injury or cause an accident resulting in injury or death. Never leave the vehicle while the ECO symbol in the multifunction display is shown in green or yellow. Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving it. 141 142 Driving Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if: Rthe Driving and parking ECO start/stop function is deactivated by pressing the ECO button. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe battery's charge status is too low. Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the driver's door is opened. Rthe bonnet is opened. Ryou shift the transmission from position D to R. Ryou steer the vehicle. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function Vehicles with manual transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rdepress the clutch pedal Rdepress the accelerator pedal ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brakes when in transmission position D or N, unless the HOLD function is activated or Rengage reverse gear R or Rdepress the accelerator pedal i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. X To deactivate: press button :. Indicator lamp ; and the ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out. X To activate: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up and the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. i The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. Driving 143 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 177) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 138). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 329). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 144 Manual transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant coolant warning lamp to cool down. may also be lit and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 303). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X At coolant temperatures under 120 †, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. Manual transmission Gear lever the way to the right. Otherwise, you could shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. ! On long and steep downhill gradients, Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, you should always push the gear lever all especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. This uses the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Automatic transmission 145 X X X Depress the clutch pedal fully. Move the gear lever to position N:. Neutral N with ECO start/stop function activated In neutral N, the engine is switched off if the vehicle speed is below a certain threshold and the clutch pedal is not depressed. For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 140). Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. i The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/ stop function, see (Y page 140). X Move the gear lever firmly to the left beyond the point of resistance and then forwards. Shift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. Shift gear according to gearshift recommendation : shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floormats or carpets are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. i Bear in mind that the power transmission between the engine and the transmission is interrupted when the engine is switched off. Therefore, to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, shift the automatic transmission to position P and apply the parking brake when the engine is switched off and the vehicle is stationary. Z Driving and parking Shifting to neutral N 146 Automatic transmission Selector lever Driving and parking Overview of transmission positions Selector lever (example) P Park position with selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive Transmission positions B Park position Prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 158) unless the vehicle is stationary. The key can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. If the key is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. Transmission position and drive program display ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behaviour is determined by: Ra shift range restriction, if selected selected drive program (Y page 147) Rthe Automatic transmission position of the accelerator pedal road speed Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Program selector button General notes The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore AMG vehicles When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Trailer towing Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2(Y page 149) depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, even if cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC is activated. X Program selector button (example) E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting i Further information on the automatic drive program (Y page 148). X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. Z Driving and parking Rthe Rthe 147 Automatic transmission 148 Driving and parking AMG vehicles Steering wheel gearshift paddles Drive program selector with manual drive program C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting RS RACE START Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill i Further information on the automatic drive program (Y page 148). X Turn drive program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer. The drive program indicator on drive program selector : lights up in red. i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START (Y page 178). : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad- dle In the automatic drive program, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever (Y page 149). In the manual drive program, you can change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever (Y page 150). i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D. Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is characterised by the following: engine and automatic transmission settings Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher X Rsporty i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to prevent the engine from overrevving, even if the shift range is restricted. Shift ranges Introduction When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range (Y page 149). The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. Derestricting the shift range X To use the engine's braking effect. 5 To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Ron steep mountain roads mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions Rin 4 To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches Restricting the shift range X or Press the selector lever to the left towards D–. Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. or X Driving situations = Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the relevant gear. Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The shift range is derestricted. Clearing the shift range restriction X Press and hold the selector lever towards D+ until D is shown once more in the multifunction display. or X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until D is shown again in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. Selecting the ideal shift range X Press the selector lever to the left towards D– and hold it in position. or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in position. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration Z 149 Driving and parking Automatic transmission Automatic transmission 150 Driving and parking and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears. Manual drive program Switching on the manual drive program Manual drive program M can be selected using the program selector or the drive program selector button. In manual drive program M, you can change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever if the transmission is in position D. X Press the program selector button (Y page 147) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 148) until M appears in the multifunction display. The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red. Upshifting X Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 148). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. X Downshifting X matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. Briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D–. or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 148). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i If you desire maximum acceleration, push the selector lever to the left or pull and hold the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission shifts to the optimal gear for the current speed. Kickdown i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Vehicles with AMG engines ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- Shift up a gear if the colour in the multifunction display in the speedometer changes to red and UP appears in the rev counter. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. Switching off the manual drive program Vehicles without the dynamic handling package with sports mode: press the program selector button (Y page 147) repeatedly until E or S appears in the multifunction display. X Vehicles with the dynamic handling package with sports mode: press the program selector button (Y page 147). M X Automatic transmission Driving and parking is no longer shown in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 148) until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display. 151 Z Refuelling 152 Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately. Releasing the parking lock manually In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to tow the vehicle away. cloth) from the right-hand edge, pulling it up and out. X Press release button ; down and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. Refuelling Important safety notes ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to lift up the selector lever cover in the centre console. Otherwise, the selector lever cover could be damaged. X X Engage the parking brake. Prise out selector lever gaiter : with a flat, blunt object, (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Do not come into contact with fuels. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. Refuelling G WARNING ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This would result in damage to the fuel system and engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire. i If the recommended fuel is not available, diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. ! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. Petrol (EN 228, DIN 51626) can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. but only as a temporary measure, you may also use regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. In some countries, the fuel grade available may not be adequate and could cause deposits to build up. In such cases, and in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part number A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Fuel grade For further information on "Fuel", see (Y page 354). ! Only refuel using unleaded premium- AMG vehicles and 12-cylinder engines grade petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RDiesel Do not mix these fuels with petrol, and do not use any additives. Otherwise, this can lead to damage to the engine. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Only additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz may be added to petrol. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RE100 ! Only refuel using super-grade unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or equivalent. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. i If the recommended fuel is not available and only as a temporary measure, you may also use premium-grade unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. ! In emergencies, and only if the recom- mended fuel is not available, you may also use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/ 82.5 MON. However, using this fuel results in considerably higher petrol consumption and significantly reduced engine performance. Avoid driving at full throttle. Z Driving and parking ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a 153 Driving and parking 154 Refuelling If no fuel other than regular petrol with 91 RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is permanently available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel in a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY ! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free premium-grade petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Diesel (EN 590) Fuel grade ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: in countries where only diesel fuels with a higher sulphur content are available, the vehicle's oil change intervals are shorter. More information about intervals for changing the oil can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuel that complies with the EN 590 European standard. Fuel that does not comply with EN 590 can lead to increased wear, engine damage and damage to the exhaust system. Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix these fuels with diesel fuels and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, this can lead to damage to the engine. This excludes flow improver; see "Low outside temperatures". Rheating ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. For further information on "Fuel", see (Y page 354). Low outside temperatures Diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. In Europe, various climate-dependent low-temperature classes are defined in EN 590. Refuelling with diesel fuel which complies with the climatic specifications of standard EN 590 can help to prevent operating problems. At exceptionally low temperatures, it is possible that the flow properties of the fuel may be inadequate. This also applies to fuel that has not been adapted to suit the climatic conditions, e.g. diesel fuel from warmer regions. i Further information about country-spe- cific fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Refuelling 155 Flow improvers can be added to improve the cold resistance of diesel fuel. The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with every fuel. Correct dosage and thorough mixing are decisive factors in ensuring improvement in lowtemperature resistance. Under certain circumstances, an excessive dosage may actually decrease low-temperature resistance and should therefore be avoided. Follow the manufacturer's dosing instructions. Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, before the flow properties of the diesel become inadequate. Malfunctions can otherwise only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage. Observe the information provided by the manufacturer when using a flow improver. Only use flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Refuelling Fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Driving and parking Flow improver : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tyre pressure table ? Fuel type Opening X Switch off the engine. Remove the key from the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. This switches the ignition to position 0, which corresponds to having removed the key. The driver's door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. Closing Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. X Z 156 Refuelling i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the Driving and parking vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents the fuel filler flap from closing after the vehicle has been locked. Refuelling 157 Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The engine does not start. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least five litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds (Y page 137). X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately 10 seconds (Y page 137). X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The key battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 78). or X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 80). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problem 158 Parking Parking Driving and parking Important safety notes Therefore, do not switch off the engine while you are driving. G WARNING Vehicles with manual transmission Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot steer the vehicle when the key is removed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release the parking brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal accident. Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X Apply the parking brake firmly. G WARNING Vehicles with automatic transmission Under no circumstances should the exhaust system come into contact with flammable materials such as dry grass or petrol, for example. Do not park the vehicle on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. The hot exhaust system could otherwise ignite the flammable material and set the vehicle on fire. X To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, engage first gear or reverse gear. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position P and the key must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the steering and brakes. Steering and braking then requires significantly greater effort. As a result, you might lose control of the vehicle, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. X X X Apply the parking brake firmly. Shift the transmission to position P. Using the key X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. i The key can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. Using KEYLESS-GO Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 137). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0, i.e. key removed. X i The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switchoff function. Driving tips Parking brake 159 Driving tips General driving tips G WARNING To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharge. X Disconnect the battery (Y page 327) or connect it to a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Never switch the engine off while the vehicle is in motion. There is no power assistance for the steering and the service brake when the engine is not running. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake, and you could therefore lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Engine oil ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: If the vehicle is mostly driven for short distances, it is possible that malfunctions may occur during the automatic cleaning of the diesel particle filter. This can lead to engine damage. Therefore, if you frequently drive short distances, make sure to drive on motorways or country roads for 20 minutes at least every 500 km. Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G WARNING Make sure that other road users are not endangered by your braking. Downhill gradients On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or, Z Driving and parking Rolling with the engine switched off 160 Driving tips on vehicles with automatic transmission, select shift range 1, 2 or 3. Driving and parking i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads G WARNING Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surface If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period of time without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salt treated roads G WARNING The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a significantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake discs. New brake pads/linings G WARNING New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Before this optimum braking effect is reached, you should compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure when braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Driving tips The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Tyre traction G WARNING Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the same road safety. You could otherwise cause an accident. Pay particular attention to the road conditions at temperatures around freezing point. If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on the ice when you brake, considerably reducing tyre traction. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Rthe Driving on flooded roads If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is 25 cm. should drive no faster than at walking pace. Ryou ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. Winter driving General notes G WARNING If the vehicle becomes trapped in snow, ensure that snow is kept away from the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle as long as the engine is running. Otherwise, poisonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousness and even death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Z Driving and parking High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles 161 Driving systems Driving and parking 162 At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 337). Driving with summer tyres Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 337). Slippery road surfaces G WARNING Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Vehicles with manual transmission: engage neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X i For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 338). Driving systems Cruise control Important safety notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 on vehicles with automatic transmission. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. G WARNING Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G WARNING Do not use cruise control Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you to drive at a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You may otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. The drive wheels may lose their grip when braking or accelerating and the vehicle may skid. Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. Cruise control lever You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. Driving systems RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. : To store the current speed or a higher ; = ? A B speed LIM indicator lamp To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed To store the current speed or a lower speed To switch between cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC To deactivate cruise control When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. Vehicles with the 4-button multifunction steering wheel: the stored speed is then permanently displayed in the status indicator together with the ¯ symbol. Vehicles with the 12-button multifunction steering wheel: the segments from the stored speed up to the maximum speed light up in the multifunction display. Selecting cruise control X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? to the pressure point. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. i Vehicles with manual transmission: Ralways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds. Rchange gear in good time. Rif possible, do not change down several gears at a time. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can otherwise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. Z Driving and parking The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: 163 Driving systems 164 Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. Driving and parking X Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Brake. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake. are driving at less than 30 km/h. RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®. Ryou shift into neutral in a vehicle with manual transmission while driving or depress the clutch pedal for longer than six seconds. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high and as a result the engine speed is too low. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, you shift into position N while driving. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Driving systems G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react in particular to: Rpedestrians Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. Therefore, always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. If DISTRONIC does not recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle in front, do not activate DISTRONIC or, if it is already active, deactivate it. This is especially the case: Rbefore corners filter lanes Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving traffic Rin complex driving situations or where lanes are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motorway DISTRONIC PLUS otherwise maintains the current speed set by you or accelerates up to the set speed. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, DISTRONIC PLUS: Ron Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or icy. The wheels could lose their grip when braking or accelerating. The vehicle could start to skid. Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distance control may be impaired. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ! You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. You will find further information under "Radar sensor system" in the index. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 363). If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 226) and operational. Z Driving and parking On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. 165 Driving and parking 166 Driving systems If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving in front of you, DISTRONIC operates in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle up to a maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed. This corresponds to approximately 40% of your vehicle's maximum braking power. You must also apply the brakes yourself if this braking power is not sufficient. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning tone sounds. In addition, the · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Brake to avoid a collision. Cruise control lever With the cruise control lever, you can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing the current speed and maintaining it Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Driving systems vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Rfor vehicles not equipped with a navigation system, the Becker® MAP PILOT must be connected. See the separate Audio 20 operating instructions. Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe parking brake is not applied. RESP® is activated. Rthe transmission is in position D. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front passenger door is closed. Rthe vehicle is not skidding. Activating while driving When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is not shown in the multifunction display and is no longer being detected, for example because it has changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and a tone sounds. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down A to the pressure point. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down A to the pressure point. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated (Y page 221). X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 170). Pulling away X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. Driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. Z Driving and parking To activate the DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: 167 168 Driving systems Driving and parking If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed, but only up to the desired speed you have stored. G WARNING If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your vehicle. In such cases, control the distance from vehicles travelling in front with the brake alone. You could otherwise cause an accident and thereby injure yourself and others. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the speed being driven and for braking in good time. Changing lanes If you wish to change to the passing lane (in countries where traffic drives on the right, the passing lane is the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: are driving faster than 60 km/h. PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front. Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signals. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision. If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. Vehicles with COMAND Online i The following function is not operational in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can react appropriately to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Rapproach or drive through a roundabout a T junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Rapproach Ryou RDISTRONIC G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist are only an aid designed to assist driving. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Example: roundabout The current speed is maintained: Rapproximately 10 seconds before the roundabout/T junction and for approximately 1.5 seconds when driving on the roundabout Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching a motorway exit and approximately 4 seconds after the motorway exit Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the set speed you specified. Stopping G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction display disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle can start moving if: The horn will also sound at regular intervals if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: RDISTRONIC Rswitch PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. Select Park (P) the engine off, open the driver's door and take off your seat belt Ropen the bonnet The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while DISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. i If the engine has been switched off, it cannot be started again until DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated. If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a fault occurs in the system or if there is a disruption in the power supply, the Brake immedi‐ ately message is shown in the multifunction display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out or shift the transmission to position P. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X Z 169 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 170 Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments Driving and parking X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Storing the current speed or calling up the stored speed G WARNING Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can otherwise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient and safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 171). Example: vehicles with automatic transmission When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 220) of the on-board computer, you can select the distance display and activate or deactivate PRESAFE® Brake. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 221). When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will see the following in the multifunction display: Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 221). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After this time, you will see the following in the multifunction display while DISTRONIC PLUS is activated: : DISTRONIC PLUS activated ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Example: vehicles with automatic transmission : Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake ; Vehicle in front, if detected = Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front ? Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable A Own vehicle There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. Z 171 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 172 or Driving and parking X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. If you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated, and the message disappears. Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the parking brake. are driving slower than 25 km/h and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected. RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position. Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility (Y page 363). Ryou switch off the radar sensor system (Y page 226). Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door is open. Rthe vehicle has skidded. If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC PLUS and a fault occurs in the system, the Brake immediately message appears in the multifunction. Depress the brake pedal immediately so that the vehicle does not roll Ryou The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles travelling on a different line DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles travelling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Driving systems Other vehicles changing lane 173 detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Driving and parking Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. SPEEDTRONIC Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 on vehicles with automatic transmission. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. Z 174 Driving systems Driving and parking G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 176) : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp G WARNING = To store the current speed or to call up Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. ? To store the current speed or a lower i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. the last stored speed speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. G WARNING If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above that stored as the limit speed. You could otherwise cause an accident. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: Rusing the cruise control lever depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) Rby It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point up : or down ?. The current speed is stored. For five seconds, the multifunction display shows the stored speed, e.g. Limit 100 km/h. Vehicles with the 4-button multifunction steering wheel: the stored speed is permanently displayed in the status indicator, e.g. LIM 100 km/h. Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: on the speedometer, the segments from the start of the scale up to the stored speed are lit up. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current driving and traffic situation. Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger you or others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control is selected. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically deactivated: Rwhen you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, if you shift to a higher gear and as a result the engine speed is too low. G WARNING It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Z 175 Driving and parking Driving systems 176 Driving systems Driving and parking Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 225). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). Dynamic handling package with sports mode General notes The most important part of the dynamic handling package with sports mode is the adjustable suspension system. This automatically controls and adapts the suspension to the respective driving situation. The calibration of the suspension depends on: Ryour driving style road surface conditions Ryour individual selection; see the following description If your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, the dynamic handling package with sports mode also includes steering wheel gearshift paddles (Y page 148) with a manual drive program (Y page 150). Rthe Example: position of dynamic handling package with sports mode button X Start the engine. Sports tuning The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Your selection remains stored until you switch off the engine. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected. Depending on the engine output, the accelerator pedal is more responsive. On vehicles with automatic transmission, drive program S is selected. Comfort tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. motorways. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortable suspension tuning is selected. On vehicles with automatic transmission, drive program E is selected. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until HOLD display : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. i If depressing the brake pedal the first Activation conditions Deactivating the HOLD function You can activate the HOLD function if: The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Rwhen Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat belt is fastened. Rthe parking brake is not applied. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Activating the HOLD function Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. G WARNING The vehicle's brakes are applied when the HOLD function is activated. For this reason, deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Ryou accelerate. The transmission is in posi- tion D or R on vehicles with automatic transmission. Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles with automatic transmission. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD function is activated. The HOLD function must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. The HOLD function does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. Example: vehicles with automatic transmission Z 177 Driving and parking Driving systems 178 Driving systems The braking effect of the HOLD function is cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if: Driving and parking Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if the HOLD function is activated and: driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. For vehicles with manual transmission: Brake immediately X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. This deactivates the HOLD function. The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while the HOLD function is still activated. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD function is deactivated. i If the engine has been switched off, it cannot be started again until the HOLD function has been deactivated. If there is a fault in the system or power supply while the HOLD function is activated, the Brake immediately message is shown in the multifunction display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. On vehicles with automatic transmission, you can also shift into position P. This deactivates the HOLD function. Rthe On vehicles with automatic transmission: Select Park (P) X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. The HOLD function is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction display disappears. A horn will also sound at regular intervals if the HOLD function is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and take off your seat belt Ropen the bonnet RACE START Important safety notes i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. G WARNING RACE START is only available when SPORT handling mode is activated. SPORT handling mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. The vehicle is therefore harder to control at the threshold range. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. RACE START should only be used on closed off circuits. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Driving systems RACE START can be activated when: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 80 †. This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing. RSPORT handling mode is activated. (Y page 69) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position D. Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot, and keep it depressed. X Turn the drive program selector clockwise (Y page 147) until the RS lamp lights up. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message. i If the conditions for activation are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 148). or To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 148). The multifunction display shows the RACE START available Depress accelera‐ tor message. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START not possi‐ ble See Owner's Manual message. X Depress the accelerator pedal fully. The engine speed rises to approximately 4000 rpm. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Release brake to start message. i If you do not release the brake pedal within seven seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The multifunction display shows the RACE START active message. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START not possi‐ ble See Owner's Manual message. i If RACE START is used repeatedly in a short period of time, it is only available again after having driven the vehicle a certain distance. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes G WARNING PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Z Driving and parking Conditions for activation 179 180 Driving systems G WARNING Driving and parking Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift to position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Side view Top view Front sensors Centre approximately 100 cm Corners approximately 60 cm Rear sensors : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) Range of the sensors General notes The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush; otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 309). Centre approximately 120 cm Corners approximately 80 cm ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. Driving systems Minimum distance Centre approximately 20 cm Corners approximately 15 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Manual transmission: Gear lever position Warning display Forwards gear or Neutral Front area activated Reverse gear, or Rear and front areas the vehicle is rolling activated backwards Automatic transmission: Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The gear lever position or the transmission position of the automatic transmission and Z Driving and parking PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. 181 182 Driving systems Driving and parking Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Trailer towing PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. Driving systems 183 Problems with PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 309). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approxThe problem may be caused by an external source of radio or imately 20 seconds. ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Parking Guidance Important safety notes Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. You receive steering instructions when parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 179). G WARNING Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may recommend parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. For example, these might be spaces where parking is prohibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. Parking Guidance measures the parking space as you drive past it. Any later changes to the parking space are not taken into account. For instance, this may be the case when the vehicle parked in front of or behind the space changes its position or when an obstacle is moved into the parking space. Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the responsibility for paying attention. If you rely solely on Parking Guidance, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. G WARNING Objects located above the height range of Parking Guidance will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Parking Guidance Z Driving and parking Problem 184 Driving systems Driving and parking might therefore issue steering instructions too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Parking Guidance in such situations. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure with Parking Guidance. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Detecting parking spaces When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Guidance is also unavailable. Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat kerbs Parking tips: ; Parking symbol Ron = Detected parking space on the right Rthat narrow roads, drive past the parking space as close as possible. Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 181) warning messages during the parking procedure. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you must not use Parking Guidance. Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow chains or an emergency spare wheel fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct effect on the steering instructions. Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also Example: vehicles with automatic transmission : Detected parking space on the left Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right = or the left : also appears. Parking Guidance only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on until you have engaged reverse gear. Driving systems 185 Parking Guidance will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Example: vehicles with automatic transmission X Parking G WARNING PARKTRONIC and Parking Guidance are merely parking aids and may not detect all obstacles. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift into position R. The following message appears in the multifunction display: Check vehicle sur‐ roundings Confirm with OK. X Press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm. The multifunction display switches to Parking Guidance. Depending on your distance from the parking space, the Please drive backwards message appears in the multifunction display. If necessary, reverse towards the parking space. This is indicated by an arrow pointing backwards. Continue reversing until you hear a tone. Stop – the parking position has been reached. The arrow is white. The Please steer to the right or Please steer to the left message appears in the multifunction display. X Example: vehicles with automatic transmission While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X To reverse into the parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. The Please steer to the left or Please steer to the right message appears in the multifunction display. X Countersteering: while the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X Z Driving and parking Rthat Driving systems 186 To reverse into the parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone. The Parking Guidance finished message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds. You may be asked to steer in a different direction and then change gear. In this case, further displays in the multifunction display will direct you to the final position. Driving and parking X X X Manoeuvre if necessary. Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 181). Reversing camera Important safety notes The reversing camera is an optical parking aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the COMAND Online display. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. The reversing camera is located in the handle strip of the boot lid. Cancelling Parking Guidance X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 182). Parking Guidance is cancelled immediately and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is cancelled automatically if it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. The parking space symbol goes out and a warning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐ ance cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Trailer towing For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Parking Guidance. When the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Parking Guidance ceases to be available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. : Reversing camera View through the camera The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. G WARNING The reversing camera is only an aid and may display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect manner, or may not even display them at all. The reversing camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. The camera cannot show objects: Rvery near to the rear bumper Rbelow the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the boot lid handle You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. This applies to the areas Driving systems G WARNING Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the boot lid is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle while you are parking. Rin Activating the reversing camera Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the "Reversing camera" function is selected in COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions for COMAND Online). X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND Online display with guide lines. X Guide lines in the COMAND Online display Depending on the date of manufacture of the vehicle, the guide lines are shown in the COMAND Online display. G WARNING Using the reversing camera can be dangerous if you are colour blind or if your ability to distinguish colours is impaired. Only use the reversing camera if you can see and distinguish between all the coloured guide lines that are displayed by the reversing camera in the COMAND Online display. G WARNING Please note that objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are. These include: Rthe bumper of a vehicle that is parked behind your vehicle Ra trailer drawbar Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe tail-end of a lorry Rslanted posts The lines are only guides, not accurate measurements of the distance to an obstacle. Therefore, you should never pass the red line when approaching an obstacle. You could otherwise cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Example: information in the COMAND Online display Z Driving and parking behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. 187 Driving and parking 188 Driving systems Guide lines ; and = show the approximate distance to the rear area. Yellow guide line ; indicates a distance of approximately 1.0 m and red guide line = indicates a distance of approximately 0.25 m. The distances only apply to objects that are at ground level. Blue guide lines : depict the width required for the vehicle. They are used to align the vehicle with the edge of the carriageway, e.g. the kerb. ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND Online or making a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Warning and display messages in the multifunction display G WARNING ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well rested and attentive driver. Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react slower. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Always take breaks in good time and regularly, especially during long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time Example: vehicles with automatic transmission X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 222). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You will then hear an intermittent warning tone twice, and the Attention Assist: Drowsiness detec‐ ted message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST Driving systems Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Speed Limit Assist Important safety notes i Speed Limit Assist is not operational in all countries. Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed limits in the multifunction display. Data from the navigation system is also used for this purpose. The display appears if a traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit is detected. If Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs, the speed limit from the digital road map is taken and shown in the display. Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs with a camera at the top of the windscreen. : Speed Limit Assist camera G WARNING Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by dirt, snow or trees. Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated. Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for instance near roadworks or on multi-lane roads. Traffic signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Information in the multifunction display Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmission with a selector lever : Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit ; Speed Limit Assist is available and the warning function is switched on in the onboard computer = Units used in the traffic sign displayed Z Driving and parking still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and it starts assessing your tiredness again if: 189 Driving and parking 190 Driving systems Briefly showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display When you activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function, a traffic sign indicating the speed limit or end of speed limit zone : may appear in the multifunction display. The traffic sign appears for approximately five seconds as soon as it is detected. Any other information in the multifunction display is hidden for this period. X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 220). Symbol ; appears. Permanently showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display If Speed Limit Assist is selected in the onboard computer, a traffic sign indicating the speed limit or end of a speed limit zone : appears in the multifunction display as soon as it is detected. Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is generally displayed until: Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed limit is detected. make a turn. Ryou leave or enter a city or town. Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, country road). Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again. X Display Speed Limit Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 220). Ryou i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist on COMAND Online. The maximum permissible speed is then displayed in the COMAND Online display; see the COMAND Online operating instructions. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 190) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 192). Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. Blind Spot Assist provides assistance at speeds higher than 30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to detected vehicles in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. The Blind Spot Assist monitoring system uses sensors in the rear bumper. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow, rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles are detected late or not at all. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 363). For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 226) and operational. Driving systems G WARNING Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. There is no display and no warning. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, the system may be unable to distinguish the neighbouring lane from the one beyond it. For this reason, vehicles in the farther lane may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. In particular, this may be the case if the vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. For example, the radar sensors must not be covered by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up in red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or Z Driving and parking Monitoring range of the sensors Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to three metres behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. 191 Driving and parking 192 Driving systems from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h, and the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist X On vehicles without a navigation system, make sure that the Becker® MAP PILOT is connected; see the separate operating instructions for Audio 20. X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 226) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 222) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Trailer towing If you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicator lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and the Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors. To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe engine is not running. Rthe electrical connection to the trailer has been established. Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. : Lane Keeping Assist camera If you have chosen the Display unit Speed-/odometer:(Y page 223) function in the on-board computer and select kmkm as the unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. No warning vibration occurs if: Ryou Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Activating Lane Keeping Assist Example: vehicles with automatic transmission X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 222). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is displayed in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Z 193 Driving and parking Driving systems 194 Driving systems Active Driving Assistance package Driving and parking General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 194) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 197). Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle that are behind the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to detected vehicles in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist also uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. Active Blind Spot Assist provides assistance at speeds higher than about 30 km/h. style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 363). For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 226) and operational. Monitoring range Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to three metres behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. It cannot detect vehicles which are overtaken at a small distance and then enter the blind spot area. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. No visual nor audible warnings are emitted and the system does not brake the vehicle to correct your course. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in Driving systems If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers respectively. An additional radar sensor is located behind the cover in the radiator grille. Make sure that the bumpers are free of dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise fail to work correctly. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up in yellow at speeds of up to 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is then no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Z Driving and parking the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. 195 Driving and parking 196 Driving systems Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the appropriate turn signals to change lanes, and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range of Active Blind Spot Assist, you will receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone, and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and the following is shown in the multifunction display, for example: Example: vehicles with automatic transmission G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Automatic braking by the system may not always be sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases, you need to steer, brake or accelerate yourself. In very rare cases, the system may detect a risk of collision where there is none and brake in error near crash barriers or similar road boundaries. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect all traffic situations and road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lat- eral distance between you and other road users or obstacles. You can, for example, countersteer gently or depress the accelerator pedal at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Either a very slight course-correcting brake application, or none at all, may occur if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou brake or accelerate decisively. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is deactivated. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. Activating Active Blind Spot Assist X On vehicles without a navigation system, make sure that the Becker® MAP PILOT is connected; see the separate operating instructions for Audio 20. X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 226) and Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 222) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Driving systems Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windscreen. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you have selected the Display unit Speed-/odometer:(Y page 223) function in the on-board computer and select kmkm as the unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Rthere Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. You will be warned by way of intermittent vibrations in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane Z Driving and parking Trailer towing If you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and the Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. 197 198 Driving systems marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Driving and parking Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. No warning vibration occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is designed to help you bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognisable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be emitted by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognised. The brake application also slightly reduces driving speed. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, the following message appears in the multifunction display: Example: vehicles with automatic transmission i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Corrective braking may not always be sufficient to return your vehicle to its original lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect the current traffic situation or other road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lateral distance between you and other road users or obstacles. In rare cases, broken lines or certain structures on the road surface may be detected by the system as solid lane markings. You can, for example, countersteer gently at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action, e.g. if you intentionally drive across a solid lane marking. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take weather conditions into account. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established. RESP® is deactivated. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if: Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction. use a turn signal. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ryou Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognised. Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist Example: vehicles with automatic transmission X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 222). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is displayed in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Trailer towing If you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Trailer towing Notes on towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer You will find the applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, in the vehicle documents. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle in the "Technical data" section. Rthe Z 199 Driving and parking Trailer towing 200 Trailer towing Driving and parking G WARNING If the Check trailer hitch locking mechanism message appears in the multifunction display while the vehicle is in motion, pull over immediately and check whether the ball coupling is correctly engaged. G WARNING Always observe the maximum speed permitted in Germany for vehicle/trailer combinations, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted. This lowers the risk of an accident. G WARNING Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. G WARNING On no account should you attempt to draw the vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing speed. General information i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres- sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 339). You will find installation dimensions and loads in the "Technical data" section (Y page 361). The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight on the ball coupling is 75 kg. However, the actual noseweight must not exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch and trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Bear in mind that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight. Please note that when towing a trailer, PARKTRONIC (Y page 179), parking guidance (Y page 183) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 190) are only available with limitations, or not at all. i The height of the ball coupling changes with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. Driving tips i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 70). In Germany, the maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer, and is either 80 km/h or 100 km/h. In some countries, higher maximum speeds are permissible for vehicle/ trailer combinations. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris Trailer towing affected more by strong crosswinds more sensitive steering Rconsumes more fuel On long and steep downhill gradients, you must shift to a lower gear in good time, or on vehicles with automatic transmission, select the shift range 1, 2 or 3. Rdemands G WARNING Make sure that the ball coupling is engaged, either in its folded-out or folded-in position, and that the indicator lamp is off. Do not turn the release wheel when a trailer is coupled up. Otherwise, the trailer might detach. i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Driving tips a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradientclimbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. If the trailer swings from side to side: X RMaintain Do not accelerate. Do not counter-steer. X Brake if necessary. X X To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise and fold down cover ;. Pull out release wheel =. X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise until the ball coupling releases and folds out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. X Folding out the ball coupling Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot. Z Driving and parking Ris 201 Trailer towing 202 Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. Driving and parking X Decoupling a trailer G WARNING Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp ? goes out. The power socket folds down automatically. Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel: the Trailer hitch Check lock mech. message is shown in the multifunction display until the ball coupling has engaged. Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: the Trailer hitch Check lock mech. message is shown in the multifunction display until the ball coupling has engaged. X Remove the protective cap from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place. X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling is clean and that, depending on the trailer specification, it is greased or dry (without grease) when used. X Coupling up a trailer G WARNING Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could become trapped between the bumper and trailer drawbar. Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the parking brake. X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X As soon as you raise the trailer drawbar, the unladen vehicle rises slightly. The vehicle then lowers to driving level. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself or others. G WARNING The vehicle is lowered as soon as you disconnect the trailer cable. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself or others. As soon as you decouple the trailer, the unladen vehicle rises slightly. Make sure that you or others are not injured in the process. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the parking brake. X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. X Folding in the ball coupling i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Otherwise, they could be injured. X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot. X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages behind the bumper. Indicator lamp ? goes out and the message in the multifunction display disappears. Trailer power supply Coupé X To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise and fold down cover ;. When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. ! You can connect consumers with a power rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power supply and up to 180 W to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. Pull out release wheel =. X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise. The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indicator lamp ? flashes. X The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. You can obtain further information about installing the trailer electrics from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0 respectively. Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an error message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message may be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 milliamperes (mA). Z 203 Driving and parking Trailer towing Trailer towing 204 Driving and parking To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA. Trailer with 7-pin connector General information If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Fitting the adapter Open the socket cover. X Insert the connector with lug : into groove ; on the socket and turn the connector clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ......... Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ......... Display messages ............................. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 206 206 206 210 232 273 On-board computer and displays 205 On-board computer and displays 206 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Important safety notes You will find an illustration of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 32). G WARNING Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. G WARNING If the instrument cluster or multifunction display fails, no messages can be displayed. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. Handling characteristics may be affected. Adapt your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The on-board computer only records and displays malfunctions and warnings from certain systems. For this reason, you should always make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You could otherwise cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehicle. G WARNING The operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardised if maintenance work is carried out incorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualified specialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. The coolant temperature may rise to the top end of the scale at high outside temperatures and on long uphill stretches. Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display The outside temperature display is in the instrument cluster (Y page 32). G WARNING At temperatures just above freezing point, the street may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid. For this reason, adapt your driving style and speed to the weather conditions. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. : Multifunction display ; W Increases the volume = X Decreases the volume ? C Scrolls through lists/adjusts val- ues/confirms display messages Operating the on-board computer The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can use the on-board computer to call up information relating to your vehicle and to make and adjust settings. i You can have certain functions set at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Example: Rautomatic door lock Rspeed limit for winter tyres You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 207 A V Selects a menu i If you press and hold the V button, the standard display appears. i In the Day. driv. lights: menu, you can use the W or X button to switch the function on or off. You cannot adjust the volume when in the Day. driv. lights: menu. Multifunction display To activate the multifunction display: Rswitch on the ignition. on the lights. Ropen the driver's door. Rswitch Z On-board computer and displays 208 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in multifunction display :. Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays Menu overview Function : Standard display(Y page 209) Shows the standard display or resets the trip meter ; Trip computer(Y page 210) Displays or resets the trip computer = Range(Y page 210) ? Current fuel consumption A Digital speedometer B Message memory(Y page 232) C Service(Y page 305) Calls up the service due date D Tyre pressure loss warning system(Y page 340) E Daytime driving lights(Y page 210) Standard display 209 X Press and hold the V button on the steering wheel, until the standard display with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; is shown. Z Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 210 To reset the trip meter: press and hold the V until the standard display appears. X Press and hold the C button until the value has been reset. X Trip computer X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the trip computer appears. : Distance ; Average speed = Time ? Average fuel consumption X To reset the trip computer: press and hold the C button on the steering wheel until the values have been reset. Calling up the range X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the approximate range appears. The approximate range which can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Switching the daytime driving lights on/off If you have activated the Day. driv. lights: function and the light switch is in the à position, the daytime driving lights are automatically switched on during daylight hours when the engine is running. When it is dark, the side lamps and the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. On vehicles with daytime driving lamps, the factory setting is on. If you want to change the setting for the Day. driv. lights: function, you have to turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1. X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the Day. driv. lights: menu appears. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the W or X button to change the setting. Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 212). G WARNING At temperatures just above freezing point, the street may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid. For this reason, adapt your driving style and speed to the weather conditions. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. Cruise control (Y page 162) activated: The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. Variable SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 173) activated: The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164) activated: One or two segments in the set speed range light up. DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Operating the on-board computer Overview The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. : Multifunction display ; Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep- arate operating instructions = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects Z 211 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 212 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 9 : a Press and hold: RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling through the phone book % sage the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station Right control panel Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory RHides RConfirms selection/display mesRIn ~ Back button % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in the multifunction display. RRejects or ends a call telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches W X RAdjusts 8 RMute the volume : Description field ; Menu bar = Drive program ? Outside temperature or speed (Y page 223) A Transmission position X To show menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Vehicles with manual transmission: the indicators in the lower part of the multifunction display differ from the display shown here. Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays The following messages can appear in the multifunction display: Z Shift recommendation (Y page 145) XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 183) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 112) À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 140) Ä Speed Limit Assist (Y page 189) à Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 192) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 197) HOLD function (Y page 177) HOLD Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 71) 120km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) 213 Z On-board computer and displays 214 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Menu overview The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle. Function : Trip menu (Y page 215) ; Navi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 216) = Audio menu (Y page 217) ? Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 219) A Assist. menu (assistance) (Y page 220) B Service menu (Y page 222) Rcalls up display messages (Y page 233) Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 340) RTyre pressure monitor (Y page 342) RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 305) C Settings menu (Y page 223) D AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 229) The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and vehicles with COMAND Online. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND Online. Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with total distance recorder : and trip meter ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 216). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select From start or From reset. Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. hours have been exceeded. R9999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is reset if the trip exceeds 9999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. R999 Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select current fuel consumption10 and approximate range. X The approximate range which can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. X Trip computer "From start" (example) : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption The From start trip computer is reset automatically when: 10 Not AMG vehicles. Z 215 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 216 information, see the separate operating instructions. Switch on the audio system with Becker® MAP PILOT or COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X : Shift recommendation ; Digital speedometer i If the gearshift recommendation is shown Route guidance not active in the multifunction display, it is not shown in the status bar. For further information on gearshift recommendations, see (Y page 145). Resetting values You can reset the values of the following functions: Rtrip meter computer "From start" Rtrip computer "From reset" X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a. Rtrip : Direction of travel ; Current street Activated route guidance No change of direction announced : Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current street ? Symbol for "follow the road's course" Resetting the trip computer "From start" (example) X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Lane recommendation display (example) : Lane continues through change of direc: Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Current street ? Change-of-direction icon When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of direction ?. This decreases in size as you approach the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. tion ; New lane during a change of direction Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. route... or Calculating route: a new route is being calculated. ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position). RNo route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. RNew Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display You can only change the waveband and store new stations using the audio system or COMAND Online. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. = Lane recommendation ? Change-of-direction icon On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation = may be shown for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed. Z 217 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 218 To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track has been reached. X : Waveband ; Station11 To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X To select a station using station search12: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting); see the separate operating instructions. Audio player or audio media operation Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select the audio device or medium (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and name of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation Switch on COMAND Online and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X DVD changer display (example) : Current scene To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired scene has been reached. X CD changer display (example) : Current track 11 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed. if no station list is received. 12 Only Telephone menu Introduction Functions and displays are dependent on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle. You can place your mobile phone in the mobile phone bracket (Y page 292), or set up a Bluetooth® connection to the audio system or COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). i You can obtain further information about RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No Service: no network is available, or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multifunction display, for example: suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rin any Mercedes Benz Service Centre the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron G WARNING Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If it is permitted to use mobile phones while the vehicle is in motion, you should only use them when the road and traffic conditions allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Switch on the mobile phone and audio system or COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has not been entered. X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system or COMAND Online. The mobile phone will search for a network. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still accept a call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still reject or end a call. Dialling a number from the phone book If your mobile phone is able to receive calls, you can search for and dial a number from the phone book in the audio system or COMAND Online at any time. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to call up the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one Z 219 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 220 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) second. After a short time, the rapid scroll speeds up. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction In the Assist. menu you can: Rdisplay Speed Limit Assist and activate/ deactivate the message function of Speed Limit Assist Rshow the distance display Ractivate/deactivate ESP® Ractivate/deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist Speed Limit Assist Displaying Speed Limit Assist In the Speed Lim. Asst. function, a detected speed limit is displayed under certain conditions (Y page 189). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. Asst.. X Press a. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function You can set Speed Limit Assist (Y page 189) to display a detected speed limit automatically for five seconds. Other messages in the multifunction display will be faded out for this length of time. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. Asst.. X Press a. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. X Press :. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. X If Speed Limit Assist is operational and the message function is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol when the ignition is switched on. Showing the distance display This function is only available with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance display. X Press a. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display (Y page 171) appears in the multifunction display. Deactivating/activating ESP® G WARNING If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: RUnder no circumstances should you deactivate ESP®. RWhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. RAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. The vehicle may otherwise begin to skid. If you drive too fast, ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. This function is not available in AMG vehicles. For activating or deactivating ESP® on AMG vehicles, see (Y page 69). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 67). X Start the engine. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. X Press the a button. X To deactivate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. G WARNING If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the engine is running, ESP® is deactivated or is unavailable due to a malfunction. The risk that your vehicle may start to skid then increases in certain situations. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To activate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Activating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select PreSafe Brake. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 71) is activated, the multifunction display shows the Z 221 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 222 Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 177). Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving at a speed under 35 km/h, the j Parking Guidance symbol is shown instead of the Ä symbol. Activating/deactivating Attention Assist Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Asst.. X Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188) is activated, the À symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. (Y page 192) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 197). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep. Asst.. X Press a. If the function is activated, the lane marking symbol in the multifunction display lights up red. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the à symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. Service menu Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist You can use the Blind Spot Asst. function to activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist (Y page 190) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 194). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot Asst.. X Press a. If the function is activated, the monitored areas in the multifunction display light up red. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist You can use the Lane Keep. Asst. function to activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist In the Service menu you can: Rcall up display messages (Y page 232) Rreset the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 340) Rreset the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 340) or check the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 342) Rcall up the service due date (Y page 305) Settings menu Introduction The Settings menu can be used for: Rchanging the instrument cluster settings Rchanging the light settings Rchanging the vehicle settings Rchanging the auxiliary heating settings Rchanging the convenience settings Rrestoring the factory settings Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rthe navigation instruction in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. Rthe Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Switching the additional speedometer on/off Only vehicles with manual transmission have this function. i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. The Dig. speedom [mph]: function allows you to choose whether the status area in the multifunction display always shows the speed in mph instead of the outside temperature. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Dig. speedo [mph]: function. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting the permanent display function Only vehicles with automatic transmission have this function. i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. The Permanent display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed in mph. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. Z 223 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 224 Press : or 9 to select the Perma‐ nent display function. You will see the selected setting: outside temperature or Dig. speedom [mph]. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Lights Switching the daytime driving lights on/ off If you have activated the Day lights function and the light switch is set to Ã, the daytime driving lights are automatically switched on during daylight hours when the engine is running. When it is dark, the side lamps and the dipped-beam headlamps are also switched on automatically. X Switch off the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Day lights function. If the Day lights have been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System If you activate the Intell. Light Sys. function, you activate the following functions: Rmotorway mode Ractive light function Rcornering light function Rextended range foglamps X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. Press : or 9 to select the Intell. Light Sys. function. If the Intell. Light Sys. function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. X If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left (Y page 224), the multifunction display shows the System inoperative display message under the image of the vehicle for the Intell. Light Sys. function in the Light submenu. Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical beam and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 108). If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are not available. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. You will see the selected setting: Rightside traffic or Left-side traffic. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. You can also have the dipped-beam headlamps set for driving on the right/left at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Adapt. main beam function. If the Adapt. main beam function has been switched on, the cone of light and the _ symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off If you have activated the Surround light‐ ing function and the light switch is in the à position, Rthe exterior lighting remains on for another 40 seconds after you unlock the vehicle using the key. The exterior lighting switches off when you open the driver’s door. Rthe exterior lighting remains on for another 15 seconds after closing the doors when it is dark. If the engine is switched off and then none of the doors are opened, or if an open door is not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds. If you activate the Surround lighting function, the following light up depending on the vehicle's equipment: Rthe side lamps Rthe foglamps Rthe daytime driving lights Rthe surround lighting in the exterior mirrors X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround lighting function. When the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and back to position 0. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Light. delay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light. delay function. When the Light. delay function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 176) using the Limit speed (win‐ ter tyres) function. Z 225 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 226 Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. You will see the current setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of 10 (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. X Switching the automatic locking feature on/off If you select the Automatic door lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. i For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 84). Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door lockfunction. When the Automatic door locks function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you activate the Acoustic Lock function, an audible signal sounds when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. When unlocking, the signal sounds once. When locking, it sounds three times. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up red. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system i You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. For further information, see (Y page 363). When you are close to radio telescope facilities, the radar sensor system will be deactivated automatically. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164) PLUS (Y page 66) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 71) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 190) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 194) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the a button to save the setting. RBAS Heating menu Auxiliary heating departure time This function is only available on vehicles with auxiliary heating (Y page 128). In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. G WARNING Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G WARNING When operating the auxiliary heating parts of the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot accordingly. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about 10 minutes. Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press the a button to confirm. When a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Change A, B or C. X Press the a button to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 228 Convenience Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature You can use the Easy Entry/Exit: function to activate or deactivate the EASY ENTRY/ EXIT feature (Y page 102). G WARNING The steering wheel moves when the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk of occupants becoming trapped. Before activating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Switching the belt adjustment on/off For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 53). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Switching the Fold in mirrors when locking function on/off If you switch on the Auto. fold in function, the exterior mirrors fold in when you lock the vehicle. When you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched the function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door (Y page 103), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 to select the Auto. fold in function. If the Auto. fold in function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Resetting to factory settings For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit Speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights function in the Light submenu, you must turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. Press the a button to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you select Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. : Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. X : Drive program (C/S/S+/M) ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling mode (SPORT) RACETIMER Displaying and starting RACETIMER You can use the RACETIMER to store lap times. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. i If the RACETIMER is selected, the = and ; buttons are inoperative. ? Engine oil temperature A Coolant temperature Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up. When the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. SETUP SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the SPORT handling mode. : Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. Z 229 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 230 Displaying the intermediate time Press = or ; to select Interm. Time. X Press the a button to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Starting a new lap It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. X Press a to confirm New Lap. Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0”. Deleting all laps If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap Stopping the RACETIMER X Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall evaluation This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X Press a to confirm YES. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press the a to confirm Start, timing is continued. : RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays = Average speed ? Distance covered A Top speed Lap evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X : Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap X 231 Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Z On-board computer and displays 232 Display messages Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 177) and parking (Y page 158). Hiding display messages You can hide some display messages with a low priority. X Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel: press C on the steering wheel to clear the display message. The display message is cleared. X Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: press a or % on the steering wheel to clear the display message. The display message is cleared. Display messages with a high priority are shown in red. You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up these display messages in the message memory. X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the message memory is shown. If there are no display messages, you will see No messages. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example. X Using the C button, scroll through the display messages. For some display messages, the + symbol appears in the multifunction display. You will find detailed information about these display messages in the section which follows. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages in the message memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Z 233 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 234 Display messages Safety systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages ABS curr. unavail. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages ABS inoperative EBD and ABS inoperative J Release parking brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å, ! and J warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. Z 235 On-board computer and displays Display messages 236 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function is active. or Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function activated, you have: Brake immediately Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 321). You can restart the engine. Rswitched J G Risk of accident Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check brake wear PRE-SAFE inoperative ü G Risk of injury Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 54). Display messages ý Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 54). Child seat position G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly. X Fit the child seat in the correct position. G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Malfunction -Work‐ shop- 6 FL malfunc. -Work‐ shop- or FR mal‐ func. -Workshop- 6 RL malfunc. -work‐ shop- or RR mal‐ func. -Workshop- G Risk of injury There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left windowbag mal‐ G Risk of injury function:wkshp There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowor bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusRight windowbag ter. malfunction:wkshp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 238 Display messages Safety systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages !÷ currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual ÷ currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 239 On-board computer and displays Display messages 240 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual T! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual J Release parking brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active. or Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function activated, you have either: Brake immediately Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 321). You can restart the engine. Rswitched J G Risk of accident Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check brake wear PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Man. G Risk of injury Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Display messages 242 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty. sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles only: you switch off ESP® Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the sensors are fully available again. RAMG vehicles only: you reactivate ESP® Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille (Y page 309). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 309). X Restart the engine. X Wait until the battery is sufficiently charged. X PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Owner's Manual ü G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 54). Display messages ý Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 54). Child seat in G Risk of injury wrong position Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontSee Owner's Manual passenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly. X Fit the child seat in the correct position. G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 G Risk of injury 6 G Risk of injury Restraint sys. mal‐ There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusfunction Consult ter. workshop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left malfunc‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 tion Consult work‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. shop or Front X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. right malfunction Consult workshop Z 243 On-board computer and displays Display messages 244 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages 6 Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop or Rear right malfunction Con‐ sult workshop 6 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury Left windowbag mal‐ There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusfunction Consult ter. workshop or Right windowbag malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tion Consult work‐ shop Lights (4-button multifunction steering wheel) i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left corner. light or Right corner. light b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Left dipped beam or (Y page 114). Right dipped-beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Trailer left tail lamp or Trailer right tail lamp The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages b Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. Trailer left indic. or or Trailer right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. indic. b Trailer brake lamp X The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Rear left indicator (Y page 114). or Rear right indi‐ or cator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself tor or Right mir‐ (Y page 114). ror indicator or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Third brake lamp b Tail/brake lamp, left or Tail/brake lamp, right The third brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 245 On-board computer and displays Display messages 246 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand high beam is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left main beam or Right main beam b Left fog lamp or Right fog lamp b Rear fog lamp b Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp b Reversing light b Rear left marker lamp or Rear right marker lamp The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right daytime driving lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp b Malfunction The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. X Check the fuses (Y page 333). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. If the display message continues to be displayed: X b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative b Switch off lights Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Lights (12-button multifunction steering wheel) i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Display messages 248 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Left cornering (Y page 114). light or Right cor‐ or nering light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Left dipped beam or (Y page 114). Right dipped beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Trailer left tail lamp or Trailer right tail lamp b Trailer left indi‐ cator or Trailer right indicator b Trailer brake lamp The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Rear left indicator (Y page 114). or Rear right indi‐ or cator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself tor or Right mir‐ (Y page 114). ror indicator or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Third brake lamp b Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp b Left main beam or Right main beam b Left fog lamp or Right fog lamp b Rear fog lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand high beam is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 249 On-board computer and displays Display messages 250 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp b Reversing light b Rear left side marker lamp or Rear right side marker lamp b Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp b Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Malfunction See Owner's Manual The reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 114). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. X Check the fuses (Y page 333). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. If the display message continues to be displayed: X b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Switch off lights Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available again if: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the camera is fully operational again. The Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Rthe Engine (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Top up coolant The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so (Y page 303). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Stop vehicle Sw. eng. Off Z 251 On-board computer and displays Display messages 252 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Rtorn If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level (Y page 302). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 303). X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Check eng. oil level 8 Reserve fuel level C The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Z 253 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 254 Display messages Engine (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 303). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ? Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra faulty alternator torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Ra If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling 8 Reserve fuel level C The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level (Y page 302). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 303). X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Z 255 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 256 Display messages Driving systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions HOLD Off The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 177). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 177). Cruise ctrl. / LIM inoperative Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control - - - km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 162). 120 km/h 120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. X Drive slower. Driving systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that the driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Drowsiness detec‐ ted À Attention Assist inoperative During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. ATTENTION ASSIST has failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Speed Limit Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rvisibility Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the camera is fully operational again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe X Clean the windscreen. Speed Limit Assist: Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries. Unavailable in X Drive on. this country Speed Limit Assist is available again when you drive in a country in which its use is approved. Speed Limit Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. HOLD Off The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 177). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 177). Radar sensor deactivated autom. See Owner's Manual Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radio telescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting any radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automatically (Y page 363). DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164) is deactivated automatically if it is activated. A warning tone also sounds. Blind Spot Assist (Y page 190) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 194) is deactivated automatically if it is activated. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 66) and PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 71) are then also not available. X Drive on. Once you have moved far enough away from the radio telescope, the above functions are available again. Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages 258 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with Becker® MAP PILOT: if the Becker® MAP PILOT is not connected, the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically. BAS PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS, Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist and PRE-SAFE® Brake are not available. X Connect the Becker® MAP PILOT, see the separate operating instructions. Radar sensor deactivated See Owner's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated (Y page 363). X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 226). Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual or Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, for example by dirt or snow. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rvisibility Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the camera is fully operational again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe X Lane Keeping Assist inoperative or Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Clean the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative if: Ryou have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. Rthe sensors are dirty. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message with a. When driving without a trailer: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Clean the sensors (Y page 309). Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance inoperative Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 183). X Restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 259 On-board computer and displays Display messages 260 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Parking Guidance cancelled Parking Guidance has been deactivated because: Rthe vehicle is skidding. sensors are dirty. Ra malfunction has occurred. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 183). Rthe If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 30 km/h: X Clean the sensors (Y page 309). X Restart the engine. If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 30 km/h: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer following the recommended path. X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in the multifunction display. Parking Guidance finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 164). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty. sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille (Y page 309). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 309). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS suspended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS --- km/h An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164). DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 261 On-board computer and displays Display messages 262 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control --- km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 162). 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h. X Drive slower. Tyres (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Check tyres Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 344). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 340). Check tyres Restart system The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 340). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 344). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 340). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 340). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving The tyre pressure monitor is measuring the tyre pressure. X Drive on. The tyre pressures appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Z 263 On-board computer and displays Display messages 264 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Check tyre(s) Caution, tyre defect Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Correct the tyre pressure (Y page 342). X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 344). G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 344). Rectify tyre pressure The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 342). Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. able X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. Display messages h Tyre pressure Cau‐ tion, tyre malf. h Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 344). G Risk of accident Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 344). X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 342). h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 342). Please correct tyre pressure Vehicle (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. P Select Park (P) You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door. You wanted to lock the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. or You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N. X Shift the transmission to position P. Z 265 On-board computer and displays Display messages 266 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions With the Hold function activated, you have either: Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Shift the transmission to position P. You can restart the engine. Rswitched N M The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. G Risk of accident Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system: the bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Close the bonnet. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. _ The driver's or front-passenger seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages. Front left seat backr. not locked or Front right seat backr. not locked Check trailer hitch lock G Risk of accident Vehicles with a retractable trailer coupling: The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Apply the parking brake. X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end position (Y page 201). Display messages Pwr. steering malfunc. Top up washer fluid Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The power steering assistance is faulty. You will need to use more force to steer. A warning tone also sounds. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 304). Vehicle (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. P Select Park (P) You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door. You wanted to lock the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. or You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N. X Shift the transmission to position P. While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have: Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Shift the transmission to position P. You can restart the engine. Rswitched Z 267 On-board computer and displays Display messages 268 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages N M Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The boot lid is open. Close the boot lid. X G Risk of accident The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Close the bonnet. If the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) has been triggered: X X Reset the bonnet (Y page 300). Close the bonnet. Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. _ The driver's or front-passenger seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages. Front left seat backrest not locked or Front right seat backrest not locked j Check trailer hitch lock G Risk of accident The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Apply the parking brake. X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end position (Y page 201). Display messages D Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident Power steering mal‐ The power steering assistance is faulty. You will need to use more force to steer. function See Own‐ er's Manual A warning tone also sounds. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. & inoperative Bat‐ tery low & inoperative Refuel vehicle & inoperative See Owner's Man. Telephone No Service The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 128). X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 128). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 128). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 304). Z 269 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 270 Display messages Key (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key does not belong to vehicle You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. + The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Replace key + Change battery Key not detected (Red display message) The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 80). The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. Key not detected (White display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. X + Key still in vehi‐ cle The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Insert key Close doors to lock veh. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Key (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key  Change key batter‐ ies  Key not detected (Red display message) The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 80). The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. Z 271 On-board computer and displays Display messages 272 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. Key not detected (White display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. X  Key still in vehi‐ cle  Remove starting button, then insert key  Close doors to lock vehicle The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Seat belt Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). 7 G Risk of injury Only for certain coun- The driver's seat belt is not fastened. tries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). The warning tone ceases. after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. 7 G Risk of injury The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. ing lamp lights up after X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). the engine starts, as The warning lamp goes out. soon as the driver's or the front-passenger G Risk of injury door is closed. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. Z 273 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 274 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 G Risk of injury The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At ing lamp flashes and an the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly intermittent audible driven faster than 25 km/h. warning sounds. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. G Risk of injury There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J G Risk of accident The red brake system There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir. warning lamp comes on while the engine is run- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving ning. A warning tone under any circumstances. also sounds. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. lamp is lit while the For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic engine is running. Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are also deactivated, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 275 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 276 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, lamp is lit while the EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, engine is running. PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also deactivated. Self diagnosis is not yet complete. or For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G Risk of accident EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are not available either. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Problem J÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ÷ Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are not available either due to a malfunction. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident The yellow ESP® warn- ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of ing lamp flashes while skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. the vehicle is in motion. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Release the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel only: do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions: (Y page 67). å G Risk of accident Vehicles with a 12-butESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are deactivated. ESP® will not ton multifunction steerstabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. ing wheel only: X Reactivate ESP®. The yellow ESP® OFF Exceptions: (Y page 67). warning lamp is lit while X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. the engine is running. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 277 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 278 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident SPORT handling mode is activated. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle in extreme situations. ESP® intervention may not be able to provide sufficient assistance in such situations and the vehicle may start to skid. X Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions: (Y page 67). If ESP® cannot be activated: X ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Problem ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ESP® is temporarily unavailable. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. Self diagnosis is not yet complete. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X J You are driving with the parking brake applied. The red brake system X Release the parking brake. warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. G Risk of injury The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at all. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 279 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 280 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 157). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Let the engine and coolant cool down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 303). Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop-start traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Let the engine and coolant cool down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 303). Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop-start traffic. Z 281 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 282 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · G Risk of accident The red distance warn- The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed ing lamp lights up while selected. the vehicle is in motion. X Increase the distance. · G Risk of accident The red distance warn- The warning is issued if you approach a stationary vehicle or a ing lamp lights up while vehicle driving ahead of you at too high a speed. the vehicle is in motion. X Be prepared to brake immediately. A warning tone also X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to sounds. brake or take evasive action. More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164) and PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 71). Tyres Problem h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp is on. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 342). X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 344). 283 284 284 284 289 Stowing and features Useful information ............................ Loading guidelines ............................ Stowage areas .................................. Features ............................................. 284 Stowage areas Useful information Stowing and features i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Loading guidelines G WARNING Secure and position the load as described in the loading guidelines. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the load being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. You will find further information in the "Securing a load" section. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, the load will increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. G WARNING Keep the boot lid closed while the vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, you could be poisoned by exhaust fumes entering the vehicle. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Stowage areas Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be placed in the luggage net. Do not place hard objects in the map pockets. Objects must not protrude from the map pockets. Stowage areas Glove compartment i The glove compartment can be ventilated (Y page 133). Stowage compartment in the centre console X To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° anticlockwise to position 1. To open: slide cover : back. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USB port and an AUX IN connection or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or USB device (see the separate Audio or COMAND APS operating instructions). X X To open: press left-hand button ; or righthand button :. The stowage compartment opens. Luggage nets G WARNING Only place lightweight objects in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharpedged or fragile objects. The luggage net canZ Stowing and features Front stowage compartments 285 286 Stowage areas moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. not secure the objects sufficiently in the event of an accident. Stowing and features Luggage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left-hand side of the boot. Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat Important safety notes Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards. X Open the boot. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. X G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. G WARNING Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the boot capacity. X X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Folding back the seat backrest Folding the seat backrest forwards X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not i Vehicles with memory function: when you fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrest forwards, the respective front seat become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Stowage areas Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. G WARNING Make sure that the rear seat backrest is correctly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. i You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorised access to the boot from the vehicle interior. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Securing a load Lashing eyelets G WARNING Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. sharp edges for protection. There are four lashing eyelets in the boot. Rpad Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat : Lashing eyelets Bag hook G WARNING Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects. When braking sharply, changing direction quickly or in the event of an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the items sufficiently. This could result in injury to yourself or others. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. Rbrake sharply direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Please observe the loading guidelines. Rchange Observe the following notes on securing loads: Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets. not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. Rdo : Bag hook Z Stowing and features X 287 Stowage areas 288 Stowage well under the boot floor Stowing and features The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must always observe the maximum roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you X To open: pull handle : upwards. only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is fitted you can: Ropen Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof fully the boot lid fully Attaching the roof carrier X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. ! Remove the handle again before closing the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or load could become detached from the vehicle. These objects might then be thrown around and could injure you or others or cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski rack manufacturer's installation instructions and special instructions for use. Vehicles with a steel roof Features 289 Stowing and features Cup holder in the front-compartment centre console Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X : Cup holders ; Cover X To open: slide cover ; back. Removing and fitting the cup holder Removing Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise, the drinks could spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. Pry groove ; away carefully on the frontpassenger side using a suitable tool until lug = becomes visible. X Pull the cup holder upwards slightly, to the stop. X Pry groove : away carefully on the driver's side using a suitable tool. At the same time, pull the cup holder upwards slightly, to the stop. X Pry groove on driver's side : and frontpassenger side ; away alternately while lifting the cup holder upwards until it can be removed. X Z Features 290 Stowing and features Fitting : Mirror light Insert left-hand and right-hand grooves ; of the cup holder into lateral springs =. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge of the upper section of cup holder : faces forwards. X Press the cup holder downwards until it engages on the front-passenger side. X Cup holder in the rear stowage box ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Ashtray X To open: slide cover : forwards. Ashtray in the front-compartment centre console i You can remove the ashtray insert and Sun visors Sun visor overview G WARNING Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled, which may impair your view of traffic conditions and as a result could cause an accident. use the resulting compartment for stowage. ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Features 291 Cigarette lighter G WARNING To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X Ashtray in the rear-compartment centre console Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X 12 V sockets Points to observe before use To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. X To remove the insert: press release button = and lift the insert up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. X The sockets can be used for accessories, e.g. lamps or mobile phone chargers with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A). If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i You can also use the sockets when the ignition is switched off. An emergency cutout ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is autoZ Stowing and features Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. Features 292 matically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Stowing and features Socket in the front-compartment centre console To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X Socket in the rear-compartment centre console A socket is fitted in the centre console in the rear compartment in vehicles with an ashtray and a cigarette lighter. Mobile phone Important notes G WARNING Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you must only do so if the traffic situation permits. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you must only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. G WARNING Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rmutual influences between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones are minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Pull cover ; out by its top edge. X Lift up the cover of socket :. X Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior. field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. Rthe Features that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. i Even if your vehicle is equppied with convenience telephony, you can connect a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone with Audio 20 or COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface. More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with Audio 20 or COMAND Online can be obtained: Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Ron Operating the mobile phone You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the luxury multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the onboard computer (Y page 219). When you take the key out of the ignition lock, the mobile phone stays on but you can no longer use the hands-free system. If you are making a call and you would like to take the key out of the ignition lock, first remove the mobile phone from the bracket. Otherwise, the call will be ended. i When a mobile phone bracket is used that is connected to the mobile phone via Bluetooth®: if you want to continue a call in "Private mode", you have to perform the necessary steps on the mobile phone (see the separate mobile phone operating instructions). i The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Inserting the mobile phone Open the telephone compartment (Y page 285). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed bracket (see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions). X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket (see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions). X You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to improve access to the stowage space beneath it. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there is a USB connection and an AUXIN connection/Media Interface fitted in the stowage compartment (Y page 285). If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, you can speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. i On some mobile phone brackets, first you have to connect the mobile phone via Bluetooth® with a mobile phone bracket (see the separate operating instructions for the mobile phone bracket). On these mobile phone brackets, the mobile phone does not have to be inserted into the bracket for you to be able to use the telephone functions. In this case, the charging function and aerial function are not available. To fold the bracket up: press button :. X To fold the bracket down: press the bracket down and allow it to engage. X Z Stowing and features i There are various mobile phone brackets 293 294 Features Garage door opener Important safety notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Stowing and features i The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements in each country. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available from: Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Rthe HomeLink® hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or +49 (0) 6838 907 277 (charges apply) Ron the Internet at: http://www.homelink.com Programming the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Programming G WARNING Only press the transmitter button on the integrated garage door opener if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves. Garage door remote control A is not part of this integrated garage door opener. i To achieve the best results, insert new batteries in garage door remote control A before programming. Before programming for the first time, clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener (Y page 296). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : starts flashing yellow. i Indicator lamp : flashes yellow immediately the first time that the transmitter button is programmed. If this transmitter button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : only starts flashing yellow after 10 seconds have elapsed. X Release the transmitter button. Point transmitter button B of garage door remote control A towards the transmitter buttons on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 5 to 20 cm. i The required distance between garage door remote control A and the integrated door opener depends on the garage door drive system. You might require several attempts. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. X X Press and hold transmitter button B on garage door remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. The programming has been successful if indicator lamp : lights up or flashes green. X Release transmitter button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener and the transmitter button on garage door remote control B. X Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror If indicator lamp : lights up red: X Repeat the programming procedure for the transmitter buttons. When doing so, vary the distance between the garage door drive remote control and the rear-view mirror. i If the indicator lamp flashes green after successful programming, the garage door system is using a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronise the garage door opener integrated in the rearview mirror with the receiver of the garage door system. Synchronising the rolling code Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. Observe the safety notes when performing the rolling code synchronisation. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the programming button of the door or gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls"). i Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Press the previously programmed button of the integrated HomeLink® garage door opener repeatedly until the door starts to move. The rolling code synchronisation is then complete. Problems when programming If you have problems when programming the integrated garage door opener, please note the following: Rcheck the transmitter frequency of garage door remote control A (this can usually be found on the rear of the remote control). Rchange the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will send a strong and precise signal to the integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror. Rwhen programming, hold garage door remote control A at different distances and angles from the transmitter button that you are programming. Try various angles at a distance of between 5 and 30 cm or the same angle but varying distances. Rif there is another remote control for the same garage door drive, perform the programming steps again using this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been fitted in the garage door drive remote control. Rnote that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press the button on the remote control again before transmission ends. Ralign the aerial cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press overhead control panel transmitter button ;, = or ? that you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. i The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the transmitter button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of 10 seconds, and indicator Z 295 Stowing and features Features Features 296 lamp : flashes yellow. Press the transmitter button again, if necessary. Clearing the memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press transmitter buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. X Press and hold transmitter buttons ; and ? until the indicator lamp turns green. Stowing and features X i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Features 297 Frequencies for the garage door opener The radio type approval number and the frequency range for the garage door opener can be found on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung. Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Stowing and features Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be correctly secured at all times using retainers and press-studs. Before you drive off, check the floormats and secure if necessary. A floormat which is not properly secured can slip and, thereby, interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the seat backwards. To fit: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X Retrofitted anti-glare film Anti-glare film retrofitted to the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile phone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. Information about anti-glare film can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z 298 299 300 300 305 306 Maintenance and care Useful information ............................ Engine compartment ........................ Maintenance ...................................... Care .................................................... 300 Engine compartment Useful information ! Do not try to press down the raised bonnet at the back. Otherwise, the bonnet could be damaged. Maintenance and care i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Engine compartment Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operating principle i The active bonnet is only available in certain countries. The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to pedestrians in certain accident situations. Raising the active bonnet increases the clearance to hard components, such as the engine. Even if the active bonnet has been triggered, you can still continue driving and have it reset at a qualified specialist workshop. If you pull the bonnet release lever, you must reset the bonnet before driving on. G WARNING If you pull the bonnet release lever and then neglect to reset the bonnet, it will not lock at the front when closed. The bonnet can then open when the vehicle is in motion and obscure your field of vision. If you pull the bonnet release lever, you must reset the bonnet before driving on. Resetting G WARNING There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner's Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. X If active bonnet : has been triggered, it is raised at the back by about 50 mm. Then, lids ; no longer rest on housings =. You can reset a triggered active bonnet yourself. Open the bonnet (Y page 301). Lift up the bonnet in centre A with both hands until the two lids of bonnet lifter ; no longer move. If you push the lids back, you will notice a resistance. X Release bonnet :. X Engine compartment If you cannot close bonnet : or the L symbol appears in the multifunction display, repeat the steps. G WARNING If the bonnet can still not be engaged properly or the L symbol appears in the multifunction display, do not continue driving. The bonnet can then open when the vehicle is in motion and obscure your field of vision. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, you may cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Opening the bonnet G WARNING Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open up and block your view. G WARNING There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner's Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G WARNING The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason, you must not reach into the fan rotation area. You could otherwise be injured. Vehicles with a petrol engine: The electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch ignition system components (ignition coil, ignition cables, spark plug connectors or test socket) while: Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Vehicles with a diesel engine: The electronic injection control uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch injection system components while: Rthe Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Rthe X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. G WARNING The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper linkage. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. Remove the key or make sure that no ignition position has been selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be off in the instrument panel. Z Maintenance and care Check whether the lids of bonnet lifter ; are resting on housings = (arrow). X The lids of bonnet lifter ; are resting on the housings: close bonnet : (Y page 302). or X The lids of bonnet lifter ; are not resting on the housings: first lift up bonnet : on left-hand side ? and then on right-hand side B. Lift up bonnet : until the respective lid of bonnet lifter ; no longer moves. The lids of bonnet lifter ; must rest on housings = (arrow). X Close bonnet :(Y page 302). X 301 Engine compartment 302 Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Maintenance and care Engine oil X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Notes on the oil level Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Closing the bonnet G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Engine compartment 303 Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Top up with the amount of oil required. X Fill carefully to the maximum mark on the oil dipstick. i Depending on the engine, the difference between the minimum mark and the maximum mark is approximately 1.5 – 2 litres. Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. The oil level is correct if the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;. X Top up the oil if necessary. X Adding engine oil H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot engine parts. above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 355). X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 137). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you could be scalded if hot coolant escapes. Example: engine oil cap Z Maintenance and care ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is Engine compartment 304 RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 371.0) (e.g. MB-Approval 371.0) Other labels and recommendations that make reference to quality level or a specification according to an MB Sheet no. (e.g. MB 371.0) are not necessarily approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Maintenance and care RMB-Approval Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X G WARNING Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling washer fluid concentrate. ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid concentrate could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. i Add windscreen washer concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year round. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 356). Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. i Components and service products must be matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: Example: washer fluid reservoir Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a container beforehand. X At temperatures above freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB SummerFit). X At temperatures below freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water X Maintenance Maintenance ASSYST PLUS service interval display Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X or X Subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display after reconnecting the battery. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 302). Service messages Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you when the next service is due. The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: Next service A due in .. days Service A due Service A overdue by ... days The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. This figure indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you report this displayed information to a qualified specialist workshop, for example a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, they can inform you of the costs the service will incur. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. Hiding a service message 4-button multifunction steering wheel: press C. X 12-button multifunction steering wheel: press % or a. X Displaying service messages X Switch the ignition on. 4-button multifunction steering wheel X Use V to select the Service menu. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. 12-button multifunction steering wheel X Press the = or ; button to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. Please bear the following in mind Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the Z Maintenance and care and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. 305 306 Care ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can obtain further information, e.g. regarding service work, from a MercedesBenz Service Centre or directly from Mercedes-Benz. Maintenance and care ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. The Service Hotline's current telephone numbers for use when you are abroad are to be found in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section of the Service Booklet. Care Notes on care Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Care of the exterior Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For this reason, following a car wash, drive with particular care until the brakes are dry. G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Care closed completely. Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Cleaning the paintwork Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Z Maintenance and care Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are 307 308 Care Care and treatment of matt paintwork If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe the following instructions in order to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect care. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! The following may cause the paint to ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy Maintenance and care the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the windows G WARNING Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in X solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the Care graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. 309 ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. X Cleaning the reversing camera back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Cleaning the exterior lighting X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Cleaning the sensors Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. ! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as wheel cleaner. X X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. Z Maintenance and care ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding Care 310 Remove any rust using a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high- Maintenance and care pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. X ! Observe the note on care provided by the trailer manufacturer. i Maintenance of the ball coupling and When cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning agents containing solvents cause the surface to become porous, and as a result plastic parts may break away and be thrown around the interior when an airbag is deployed, which may result in severe injuries. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: trailer tow hitch can also be performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. Interior care Cleaning the display Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/ LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Care Cleaning wooden trim and trim pieces i Note that regular care is essential to Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the seat belts ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. cleaning agents. Do not dry the seatbelts at temperatures above 80 † or by exposing them to direct sunlight. Cleaning the seat covers ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- uine leather, artificial leather or Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service centre. Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Z Maintenance and care X such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. 311 312 313 314 314 316 325 329 330 333 Breakdown assistance Useful information ............................ Where will I find...? ........................... Flat tyre ............................................. Battery ............................................... Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Electrical fuses ................................. Where will I find...? 314 Useful information Setting up the warning triangle i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Breakdown assistance i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). X X Where will I find...? Fold feet = down and out to the side. Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper press-stud :. Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle The warning triangle is secured on the inside of the boot lid. X Open the boot lid. X Press warning triangle holder : up in the direction of the arrow, open it and remove the warning triangle. First-aid kit Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the first-aid kit is located either in an open stowage space or behind the left-hand side trim panel. X Open the boot lid. Example: first-aid kit behind the side trim panel To open the cover: turn rotary knob : in the direction of the arrow and fold down cover ;. X Remove the first-aid kit. X Where will I find...? 315 Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. i Vehicles without a spare wheel are not Example: first-aid kit in an open stowage space X Remove first-aid kit :. i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit X at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing contents. Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: lift up the boot floor (Y page 288). Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front of the driver's seat. : Tyre sealant filler bottle ; Tyre inflation compressor = Towing eye ? Folding wheel chock A Wheel wrench Pull tab : upwards. X Remove fire extinguisher ;. X i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. B Jack C One pair of gloves (behind jack) X Vehicles with a spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: lift up the boot floor (Y page 288). Breakdown assistance equipped with the tools needed to change a wheel when they leave the factory, e.g. a jack or wheel wrench. Country-specific differences are possible. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. To obtain tools approved for your vehicle, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 316 Flat tyre To remove the spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: remove vehicle tool kit tray :. X Turn stowage well ; anti-clockwise and remove it. X Remove the spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. X : Vehicle tool kit tray Breakdown assistance ; Stowage well = Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel The vehicle tool kit contains: RFoldable wheel chock RFuse allocation chart RJack ROne pair of gloves RWheel wrench RTowing eye Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel For further information on changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel, see (Y page 321). Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Ra TIREFIT kit emergency spare wheel RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) (Y page 324) Ran i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 288). Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Firmly depress the parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P. X X Switch off the engine. Flat tyre All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area whilst a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 314) a suitable distance away. Observe legal requirements. X TIREFIT kit Using the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to -20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, your safety is at particular risk as tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre greater than 4 mm. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the boot floor (Y page 315). X Affix part : of the sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X G WARNING TIREFIT must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing. RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. RChange out of clothing which has come into contact with TIREFIT immediately. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doctor immediately. Keep TIREFIT away from children. Z Breakdown assistance Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 137). X 317 Flat tyre 318 RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately. RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes. i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can Breakdown assistance then be removed like a layer of film. If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Your vehicle is provided with one of two different TIREFIT kits: RVersion 1: the tyre inflation compressor and the tyre filler bottle both have their own fixed hoses. RVersion 2: the tyre inflation compressor and the tyre filler bottle do not come with a fixed hose. This is in the housing of the tyre inflation compressor. TIREFIT kit version 1 Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter socket (Y page 291) or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle (Y page 291). X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock. X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). ! Do not operate the tyre inflation comPull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Insert tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. X pressor for longer than six minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 320). If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 319). Flat tyre Press on/off switch ? on the tyre inflation compressor to ON. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X X With the sealing rings in front, slide the yellow cap A of the tyre sealant bottle : into the mounting of the tyre inflation compressor ;, until the cap engages. X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the bottom section of the tyre inflation compressor housing. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : until the plug engages. Make sure that both teeth engage. X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than six minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved, see (Y page 320). If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved, see (Y page 319). Tyre pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) not reached Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve. X Insert plug = into the socket of the cigarette lighter (Y page 291) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 291). X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock. X If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. G WARNING If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) cannot be achieved, the tyre is too severely damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out Z Breakdown assistance TIREFIT kit version 2 319 Flat tyre 320 the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values, see the fuel filler flap). X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. Tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi) is reached X Breakdown assistance X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of the filler hose. This may cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X G WARNING Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Example: TIREFIT kit, version 2 X To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. TIREFIT kit version 1: take the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor recess. X TIREFIT kit version 1: unscrew the hose from the tyre inflation compressor to the flange of the tyre sealant bottle. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. G WARNING If the tyre pressure is less than 130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi), the tyre is too severely damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. TIREFIT kit version 2 TIREFIT kit version 2: to remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre inflation compressor, push the locking mechanisms on the yellow cap together. X TIREFIT kit version 2: pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. X Flat tyre Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING Have the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Vehicles without an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel are not equipped with wheel-changing tools at the factory. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, wheel wrench or centring pin, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 316). X If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, uncouple it. X Remove the following items (depending on the vehicle's equipment) from the stowage well under the boot floor: Rthe emergency spare wheel or spare wheel Rthe folding wheel chock Rthe wheel wrench Rthe jack X Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle G WARNING The wheel and tyre size of the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of the damaged wheel. When using an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel the handling characteristics of the vehicle may change. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Never operate the vehicle with more than one emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that differs in size. Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel of a differing size briefly and do not switch off ESP®. When using an emergency spare wheel you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 315). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. Z Breakdown assistance The filler hose remains attached to the tyre sealant bottle. 321 Flat tyre 322 Raising the vehicle Fold both plates upwards :. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X Breakdown assistance X G WARNING The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. The vehicle must be placed on stands if you intend to work under it. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. The vehicle could otherwise slip off the jack and seriously injure you. Do not start the engine at any time while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid is opened or closed) and seriously injure you. G WARNING If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may: Rslip Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. off the jack you or others Rbe damaged. Therefore, make sure that the jack is positioned correctly in the respective jacking points. Before positioning the jack, remove any dirt that may have collected in the jacking points. Please note that you must position the jack in the opening of the jacking point. Rinjure Flat tyre X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points for the jack are located behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels (arrows). 323 Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under the jacking point. X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. X Removing a wheel X Unscrew the wheel bolts. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub. G WARNING X Position jack = at jacking point ;. If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. Other wheel bolts could work loose or damage the brake system. Z Breakdown assistance ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. Flat tyre 324 Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle could topple off the jack. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. G WARNING Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it together with the rest of the vehicle tool kit in the stowage well under the boot floor. X Transport the faulty wheel in the boot. Breakdown assistance or X X Slide the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel onto the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. Lowering the vehicle Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A ). The tightening torque must be 130 Nm. Depending on the size of the wheel, you may also be able to secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel well. In this case, you will have to remove the stowage tray from the spare wheel well and stow it securely in the boot. i When you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) allow you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with the activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with the tyre pressure monitor. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. It is 80 km if the vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. Battery G WARNING The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Rwhen cornering braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden changes in direction, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further if you drive carefully and conservatively. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Rwhen Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the wheel(s) checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The faulty tyre must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthere i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you only use tyres marked MOExtended and of the specified size for the vehicle. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Battery Important safety notes In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Only replace a battery with a battery that has been recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. G WARNING Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean Z Breakdown assistance You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. 325 326 Battery water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Breakdown assistance Observe this Owner's Manual. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled in an environmentally responsible manner. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. G WARNING For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: Rdo not lean over the battery. Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery. Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit and the battery's gas mixture could ignite. Rmake sure that you do not create an electrostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The battery may explode as a result of electrostatic charge or due to flying sparks. ! Switch off the engine and remove the key before disconnecting the terminal clamps from the battery. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. You may otherwise destroy electronic components, such as the alternator. i When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g. removing or charging. Have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Installation location of the battery Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the engine compartment. It is fitted in front of the front bulkhead on the right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. Battery Apply the parking brake firmly and on vehicles with automatic transmission, shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock and remove it, or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition has been switched off (Y page 137). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. 327 X Open the bonnet (Y page 301). : Battery ; Positive terminal = Negative terminal ? Breather hose Loosen the negative terminal clamp on the battery and remove it. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal clamp. X Loosen the positive terminal clamp on the battery and remove it. X Remove breather hose ? from the side of the battery. X Release clamps ; on filter box : using a suitable object, such as a screwdriver. X Remove filter box :. X i Information on disconnecting the battery (Y page 327). Disconnecting the battery ! Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. Removing/fitting the battery To remove: disconnect the battery (Y page 327). X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in place. X Remove the battery. X To fit: follow the steps described in "To remove" in reverse order. X Reconnecting the battery ! Always connect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Connect the positive terminal clamp and secure the cover. X Z Breakdown assistance X Battery 328 Connect the negative terminal clamp. X Put the filter box back in place, then clip in and close the retaining clamps. X Close the bonnet. ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- i If the power supply has been interrupted, The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 329). X Open the bonnet (Y page 301). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 329). X e.g. if the battery has been reconnected, you must carry out the following tasks: Rset the clock; see the separate operating instructions. the function for automatically folding the exterior mirrors in/out by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 104). Breakdown assistance Rreset mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. X Charging the battery G WARNING Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This could injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information about battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged while still installed from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Jump-starting 329 Jump-starting G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started. G WARNING ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may dam- age the catalytic converter13 and create a risk of fire. Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine. Make sure the jump leads are not damaged. Make sure the jump leads are not touching any other metal objects when they are connected to the battery. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has cooled down14 . X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. X Only use jump leads which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. X Make sure that the jump leads cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. i Jump leads and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Apply the parking brake firmly. X Manual transmission: engage neutral. X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the bonnet (Y page 301). X X 13 Only 14 Only vehicles with a petrol engine. vehicles with a petrol engine. Z Breakdown assistance Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery" in the index. Breakdown assistance 330 Towing and tow-starting Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Allow the engine to run for a few minutes before disconnecting the jump lead. X First, remove the jump lead from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time disconnecting from the contacts on your own vehicle first. X After removing the jump lead, close cover : on positive terminal ;. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The jump-starting procedure is not a standard operating state; therefore, have the battery checked. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing and tow-starting. G WARNING If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system. The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will need more force to steer and brake, you may have to depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Rthere Towing and tow-starting G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P (Y page 152). i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the automatic locking feature (Y page 84). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 73) before the vehicle is towed. Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball coupling and connect the towbar to it (Y page 201). X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 315). G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be particularly careful when removing the rear cover. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, under the covers. key instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and shift the automatic transmission to N. Then, turn the key back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock. When towing a vehicle with an automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position N. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission Z Breakdown assistance Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. 331 Towing and tow-starting 332 Take cover : off the opening. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. X Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. Breakdown assistance X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 330). ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 111). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. X Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 330). G WARNING The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need much more effort to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 111). i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When the combination switch is reset, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral. or X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to first gear or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P. X Electrical fuses ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) When tow-starting, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 330) and the legal requirements in each respective country. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. Before tow-starting the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe battery is connected. engine has cooled down. Rthe catalytic converters have cooled down. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 111). X Fit the towing eye (Y page 331). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the clutch pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Engage second gear. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not operate the accelerator pedal while doing so. The engine is started. Rthe Depress the clutch pedal and shift to neutral. X Stop at a suitable place. X Apply the parking brake. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 332). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. X Electrical fuses Important safety notes The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. G WARNING Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. A MercedesBenz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Z Breakdown assistance Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. X 333 Electrical fuses 334 Park the vehicle and apply the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X Take lines ; from the guides. X To open: open clamps :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the Before changing a fuse X Breakdown assistance Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rfuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 315) in the stowage compartment under the boot floor. Fuse box in the engine compartment X fuse box when the cover is open. To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down the cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X ! The cover must be fitted properly, other- wise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses. X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are turned off. G WARNING Make sure that the windscreen wipers are turned off and the key is pulled out of the ignition lock before you open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and the wiper rods above the cover could be set in motion. This could lead to you or others being injured by the wiper rods. X X Close the bonnet (Y page 302). Fuse box in the boot X Open the boot lid (Y page 85). X To open: release cover : at the top and open it downwards in the direction of the arrow. Open the bonnet (Y page 301). 335 336 336 336 337 339 344 345 Wheels and tyres Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Operation ........................................... Winter operation ............................... Tyre pressure .................................... Changing a wheel ............................. Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 336 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres examined at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, can get damaged. Wheels and tyres Important safety notes G WARNING Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle or are not used as they should be, can impair driving safety. As a result, you could cause an accident. Before purchasing and using them, enquire about their suitability, legal stipulations and factory recommendations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. This invalidates the General Operating Permit for the vehicle. i Further information about tyres and wheels can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Operation Notes on driving RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at least every 14 days, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 337). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre pressure monitoring systems) other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres including the emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 339). Winter operation G WARNING Bear in mind that: Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. Thus, you should replace tyres that have insufficient tread. Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tread depth is 4 mm or less as they no longer provide adequate grip. Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the tyre tread more easily. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident due to the reduced grip of the tyres on the road. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 100 km, as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) allow you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or with the tyre pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by MercedesBenz. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You will find notes on driving with a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 324). Winter operation Please bear the following in mind At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 344). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power; change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. M+S tyres At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Z Wheels and tyres Tyre tread 337 Winter operation 338 Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter, as these tyres have been designed specifically for driving on snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Wheels and tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter use and can no longer provide sufficient grip. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres which have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 176). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: X X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 339). Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 340). G WARNING If you fit the spare wheel when driving with M +S tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will be impaired due to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rit is not permissible to attach snow chains to all wheel-tyre combinations; see the information under "Wheel/tyre combinations" in the "Wheels and tyres" section. Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels, e.g. a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Rfit snow chains only in pairs and only to the rear wheels. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish to fit snow chains to steel wheels, make sure that you remove the respective wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may otherwise be damaged. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. i You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 67) when pulling away with snow chains fitted. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Tyre pressure 339 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications Instead of the complete tyre size, the rim diameter alone, for example R16, may be listed. Rim diameter : is part of the tyre size and can be found on the tyre sidewall. G WARNING Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low has a negative effect on the vehicle's driving safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Therefore, you should regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for that tyre size. To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. G WARNING Do not fit anything else to the tyre valve other than the standard valve cap. In particular, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors which are screwed on to the valve may overload it and cause it to fail. Due to their design, the valve Z Wheels and tyres You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Operation with emergency spare wheel: The applicable value for the emergency spare wheel is stated on the spare wheel and in the technical data section. Operation with a trailer: The applicable value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre pressure value stated on the table inside the fuel filler flap. The table inside the fuel filler flap may state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary – for more information please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If no other data is stated, the tyre pressures specified on the fuel filler flap apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. 340 Tyre pressure is kept open continuously, which may lead to air loss. G WARNING Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: Rcheck the tyre for foreign bodies. Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. sure that only a valve cap approved by Mercedes-Benz is fitted on the tyre valve. Tyre pressures that are too low have a negative effect on vehicle safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Wheels and tyres Rmake If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than 1.5 km. Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed you are driving at and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure may change by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres and only correct it if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) Rcause i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. Tyre pressure loss warning system Important safety notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. G WARNING The tyre pressure loss warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Tyre pressure Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. Rchanged or If you wish to cancel the restart: Rchanged X the tyre pressure the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four tyres is set correctly for the respective operating conditions. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 339). G WARNING The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in vehicle instability when driving, thus increasing the risk of an accident. Restarting using the 4-button multifunction steering wheel X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the V button to select Tyre pressure Menu: R. X Press the C button. The RFI active Restart: R message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the C button. The Tyre press. OK? message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the W button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. Press the X button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Restarting using the 12-button multifunction steering wheel X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X or If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or Z Wheels and tyres Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: 341 Tyre pressure 342 If the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, use 9 or : to select Can‐ cel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. X Tyre pressure monitor Wheels and tyres Important safety notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the correct sensors are fitted to all wheels. G WARNING The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. Information on tyre pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the multifunction display. i The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a filling station with a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on- i The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Servicemenu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message appears. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically recognises new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active display message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel's current tyre pressure. Tyre pressure If the tyre pressure monitor detects a significant pressure loss on one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Each tyre that is affected by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted in the pressure display. If the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display: X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 339). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Servicemenu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure of the individual tyres or the Tyre pressures will be dis‐ played after a few minutes of driv‐ ing message. X Press the : button. The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. i For an overview of the menus, see (Y page 214). If you wish to define the new reference values manually: X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor In certain countries, a radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor may be required. The radio type approval number for the tyre pressure monitor can be found online at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung. Z Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure monitor warning messages 343 344 Changing a wheel Changing a wheel Flat tyre The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 316) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tyre. It also provides instructions on changing a wheel or fitting the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel. Interchanging the wheels Wheels and tyres G WARNING Interchange the front and rear wheels only if they have the same dimensions, for example size, offset, etc. After every wheel interchange/change, have the tightening torque checked at a qualified specialist workshop that has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts of the correct size which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5000 km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Do not reverse the direction of tyre rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Always have the tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may fit an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. Wheel and tyre combinations Please bear the following in mind ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres with run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about tyres, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. i You will find a table of tyre pressures on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 339). i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Rwith i Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle RFA: In the following table, the wheel/tyre combinations are allocated to the vehicle models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.: V1 C 18015 V2 C 220 CDI15 V3 C 25015, C 250 CDI15 V4 C 35015 V5 C 63 AMG recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not 15 BlueEFFICIENCY Z Wheels and tyres Wheel and tyre combinations 345 346 Wheel and tyre combinations Wheels and tyres Tyres Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 BA 195/60 R16 89 V16 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 39 # — — — — BA 205/55 R16 91 V16 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — — — BA 205/55 R16 91 W16 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # # — — BA 225/50 R16 92 V16, 17 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # — — — BA 225/50 R16 92 W16 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 W16 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended16, 18 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — FA RA 225/45 R17 91 W 245/40 R17 91 W19 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 # # # # — FA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended18 245/40 R17 91 W MOExtended18, 19 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL16, 20 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # — FA RA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL20 245/35 R18 92 Y XL19, 20 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 58 # # # # — FA RA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL20 255/35 R18 94 Y XL19, 20, 21 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 54 # # # # — FA RA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL20 255/35 R18 94 Y XL19, 20, 21 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 54 # # # # — FA RA 225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL20 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL19, 20, 21 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 54 # # # # — RA 16 Not 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 in combination with sports suspension code 486 or dynamic handling package code 483. available from the factory. 18 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 19 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 20 Observe notes on "large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 21 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776). 17 Not Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 FA RA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL19, 20 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54 — — — — # FA RA 235/35 ZR19 XL20 255/30 ZR19 XL19, 20 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 54 — — — — # Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 BA 195/60 R16 89 H M+Si 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 39 # — — — — BA 205/55 R1 6 91 H M+Si 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — — — BA 225/50 R16 92 H M+Si17 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+SiMOExtended17, 18 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si20 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 V XL M+Si20 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — # BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si20 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 # # # # — BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si19 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — # FA RA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si19, 20 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54 — — — — # 19 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. notes on "large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 17 Not available from the factory. 18 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 20 Observe Z 347 Wheels and tyres Wheel and tyre combinations 348 Wheel and tyre combinations "Minispare" emergency spare wheel19 Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 T 125/90 R16 98 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 16 H2 ET 20 # # # — — T 125/80 R17 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 20 # # # # — T 125/70 R18 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 18 H2 ET 20 — — — — # Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted. Wheels and tyres i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel. 19 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 349 350 350 350 351 352 353 357 360 361 363 Technical data Useful information ............................ Notes on the technical data ............. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Vehicle identification plates ............ Service products and capacities ..... Vehicle data ...................................... Boot lid opening dimensions ........... Trailer tow hitch ................................ 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) ..................................... 350 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Notes on the technical data Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EC Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. Therefore, the data may differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can find technical data on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case if: Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. Rother road users could be endangered. Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely affected. G WARNING Driving safety may be impaired if nonapproved parts, tyres and wheels or safetyrelevant accessories are used. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other parts. MercedesBenz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet this requirement. The use of non- Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Rdoor Vehicle electronics Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 352) and the engine number (Y page 353) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing the fittings. ! Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. The transmission output at the aerial base must not exceed the maximum values below. Waveband Maximum transmission output (PEAK) Short wave (f < 54 MHz) 100 W 4 m waveband 30 W 2 m waveband 50 W G WARNING Only have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle's roadworthiness could be affected. ! Only have maintenance work on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Technical data H Environmental note 351 Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W 70 cm waveband 35 W GSM 900/AMPS 10 W GSM 1800 10 W UMTS 10 W The following aerial positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly installed: Retrofitting of two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 2160922 implementation regulation when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. 22 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment. Z 352 Vehicle identification plates bands: trunked radio/Tetra, 70 cm waveband, GSM 900/AMPS, GSM 1800 and UMTS. Legal provisions for fittings must be observed. RF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of 100 mW (PEAK) may be used in the vehicle without restrictions. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed, e.g. approved wavebands, maximum output and aerial positions on the vehicle. : Front roof area23 ; Rear roof area Technical data = Rear wing24 ? Boot lid G WARNING Vehicle identification plates Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction. The vehicle's operating safety and thus your own safety are impaired. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number G WARNING Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. X Open the right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Deviations with respect to aerial locations, output and frequencies must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. There is no restriction for aerial positions in the outer area of the vehicle for these wave23 Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: this area is not permitted. installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road. 24 Recommended Service products and capacities 353 Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see vehicle identification number (VIN) ;. X Engine number ; Vehicle manufacturer = EU type approval number Service products and capacities ? Vehicle identification number (VIN) Important safety notes A Maximum permissible gross vehicle B C D E weight Gross combination mass Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code Vehicle identification number (VIN) In addition to being stamped on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle body. It is located on the floor in front of the righthand front seat. Service products include the following: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products that have been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz. These products are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant section. You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations that relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (such as MB 229.5) have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant Z Technical data Vehicle identification plate (example) : Vehicle identification plate The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. More information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 354 Service products and capacities regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel Approximately 14 l Reserve fuel in all other models Approximately 8 l ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. For further information on refuelling and on fuels, see (Y page 152). Notes on fuel consumption Important safety notes The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: G WARNING Technical data Reserve fuel in AMG vehicles Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. Rat G WARNING i Only for certain countries: you can find Do not come into contact with fuels. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. Tank capacity Total capacity C 18025 C 25025 C 220 CDI25 C 250 CDI25 59 l Total capacity C 35025 AMG vehicles 66 l 25 BlueEFFICIENCY. very low outside temperatures urban traffic Rfor short journeys Rwhen towing a trailer Rin mountainous terrain Rin the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures are in each case based on the currently applicable version. Rfor vehicles up to the EURO 4 standard in accordance with EU Directive RL 80 / 1268 / EWG Rfor vehicles complying with the EURO 5 standard or higher in accordance with Regulation (EC) Nr. 715 / 2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. ! Do not use any fuel additives, as they can cause malfunctions and engine damage. Service products and capacities CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. Engine oil Please bear the following in mind The quality of engine oils is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils which correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines MB Approval 18026 C C 25026 229.3, 229.5, 229.51 C 35026 229.3, 229.5 C 63 AMG27 229.5 Diesel engines MB Approval Vehicles with a diesel particle filter C 220 CDI26 C 250 CDI26 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 l of the following engine oils, once only, until the next oil change: with a petrol engine28: MB Approval 229.1 or ACEA A3 Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB Approval 229.1 or ACEA C3 Rvehicles Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. 26 BlueEFFICIENCY. 27 Restriction: 28 Restriction: only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used. only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used for AMG vehicles. Z Technical data H Environmental note 355 356 Service products and capacities Vehicle model Capacity including oil filter C C 25029 5.5 l C 220 CDI29 C 250 CDI29 C 35029 6.5 l C 63 AMG30 8.5 l 18029 Additives ! Do not use additives in engine oil. This could damage the engine. Technical data Engine oil viscosity Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table below shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz. Information about approved brake fluids can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due. Coolant Important safety notes The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point Rantifreeze i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. The engine could otherwise be damaged. Further information on coolants and on filling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at 29 BlueEFFICIENCY. 30 Including external oil cooler. Vehicle data ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the cooling system will not be sufficiently protected from corrosion, and the boiling point will be too low. If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant will be around 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to around -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 † ); otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. ! The engine cooling system is filled with coolant that must be renewed after 15 years, or after 250,000 km at the latest. Vehicle data Vehicle data, C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle dimensions Vehicle width without exterior mirrors 1770 mm Vehicle height31 1406 mm Wheelbase 2760 mm Vehicle weight32 Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Directive), manual transmission Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Directive), automatic transmission The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 352). Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4590 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1997 mm 31 The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. 32 Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Z Technical data http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can also consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 357 Technical data 358 Vehicle data Vehicle data, C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle data, C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4590 mm Vehicle length (ECE) 4590 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1997 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1997 mm Vehicle width without exterior mirrors 1770 mm Vehicle width without exterior mirrors 1770 mm Vehicle height33 1406 mm Vehicle height35 1406 mm Wheelbase 2760 mm Wheelbase 2760 mm Vehicle weight34 Vehicle weight36 Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 352). 33 The Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 352). values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. 34 Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. 35 The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. 36 Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Vehicle data Vehicle data, C 220 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4702 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1997 mm Vehicle width without exterior mirrors 1770 mm Vehicle height37 1433 mm Wheelbase 2765 mm Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) 1730 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 352). Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4590 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1997 mm Vehicle width without exterior mirrors 1770 mm Vehicle height38 1406 mm Wheelbase 2760 mm Vehicle weight39 Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Directive), manual transmission Technical data Vehicle data, C 63 AMG 359 Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Directive), automatic transmission The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Z 360 Boot lid opening dimensions Vehicle weight Vehicle weight39 Maximum boot load 100 kg Technical data Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 352). The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Vehicle data, C 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle dimensions Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 352). Vehicle length (ECE) 4590 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1997 mm Vehicle width without exterior mirrors 1770 mm Vehicle height40 1406 mm Wheelbase 2760 mm Boot lid opening dimensions Vehicle weight41 Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Directive), manual transmission Unladen weight (in accordance with EC Directive), automatic transmission 39 Missing : Opening height : 1654 – 1669 mm i The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. values were not available at the time of going to print. values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. 38 The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. 40 The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. 41 Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. 37 The Trailer tow hitch 361 Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions G WARNING Only have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (vehicles without the AMG sports package) : Anchorage points ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line Technical data changes to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. Z 362 Trailer tow hitch Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (vehicles with AMG sports package) : Anchorage points Technical data ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension is 1,151.3 mm (vehicles without the AMG sports package) or 1,178.8 mm (vehicles with the AMG sports package). Trailer loads All models42 Permissible trailer load, unbraked 750 kg Permissible trailer load, braked43 1800 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight44 42 The 75 kg C 63 AMG cannot be used to tow a trailer. a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill. 44 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. 43 At 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 363 Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer Coupé Manual transmission Automatic transmission C 18045 1115 kg 1140 kg C 25045 – 1140 kg C 35045 – 1160 kg C 220 CDI45 1150 kg 1150 kg C 250 CDI45 1175 kg 1180 kg The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. When you are driving in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate the system using the on-board computer (Y page 226). The current country overview can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically near radio telescope facilities. The currently active systems are automatically deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164) Spot Assist (Y page 190) RActive Blind Spot Assist(Y page 194) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 50) A display message appears in the multifunction display to tell you that the radar sensor system is being switched off (Y page 257). BAS PLUS (Y page 66) is then also unavailable. If the deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer (Y page 226). Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility (Y page 226). RBlind Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Egypt – – – Andorra – – – 45 BlueEFFICIENCY. Z Technical data 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Technical data 364 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Australia Parkes 32°59'59" S,148°15'44" E 10 km Narrabri 30°18'52" S,149°32'56" E 10 km Canberra 35°23'54" S,148°58'40" E 3 km Western Australia 26°37'13"S,117°30'40" E 10 km Bahrain – – – Belgium – – – Bosnia-Herzegovina – – – Bulgaria – – – Denmark – – – Germany Effelsberg 50°31'32" N, 06°53'00" E 6.5 km Estonia – – – Finland Metsähovi 60°13'04" N, 24°23'37" E 7 km Tuorla 60°24'56" N, 22°26'31" E 5 km Plateau de Bure 44°38'01" N, 05°54'26" E 35 km Floirac 44°50'10" N, 00°31'37" W 35 km Gibraltar – – – Greece – – – Cambridge 52°09'59" N, 00°02'20" E 9 km Darnhall 53°09'22" N, 02°32'03" W 5 km Jodrell Bank 53°14'10" N, 02°18'26" W 9 km Knockin 52°47'24" N, 02°59'45" W 5 km Pickmere 53°17'18" N, 02°26'38" W 5 km Ireland – – – Iceland – – – Medicina 44°31'14" N,11°38'49" E 20 km Noto 36°52'34" N, 14°59'21" E 8 km Sardinia 39°29'50" N, 09°14'40" E 15 km France United Kingdom Italy 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Yemen – – – Jordan – – – Canada – – – Qatar – – – Croatia – – – Kuwait – – – Latvia Ventspils 57°33'12" N, 21°51'17" E 8.5 km Lebanon – – – Lithuania – – – Luxembourg – – – Malaysia – – – Malta – – – Macedonia – – – Mexico – – – Mongolia – – – New Zealand – – – Netherlands – – – Norway – – – Oman – – – Austria – – – Pakistan – – – Kraków-Fort Skała 50°03'18" N, 19°49'36" E 1 km Toruń-Piwnice 52°54'48" N, 18°33'30" E 1 km Portugal – – – Romania – – – Dimitrov 56°26'00" N, 37°27'00" E 35 km Kalyazin 57°13'22" N, 37°54'01" E 35 km Pushchino 54°49'00" N, 37°40'00" E 35 km Poland Russia Technical data Country 365 Z 366 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Zelenchukskaya 43°49'53" N, 41°35'32" E 35 km – – – Sweden Onsala 57°23'45" N, 11°55'35" E 12 km Switzerland Bleien 47°20'26" N, 08°06'44" E 3 km Singapore – – – Slovakia – – – Slovenia – – – Yebes 40°31'27" N, 03°05'22" W 15 km Robledo 40°25'38" N, 04°14'57" W 7 km South Africa – – – Syria – – – Czech Republic – – – Turkey – – – Ukraine – – – Hungary Penc 47°47'22" N, 19°16'53" E 2 km USA – – – United Arab Emirates – – – Cyprus – – – Saudi Arabia Technical data Spain 367 368